200 Odyssey Online Reference Owner's Manualtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AOD0303OM/enu/OD...2003 Odyssey Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout

2003 Odyssey Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.

Contents

Owner's Identification Form

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... i

A Few Words About Safety .......................................................................................................................... ii

Your Vehicle at a Glance ...............................................................................................................................2

Driver and Passenger Safety .......................................................................................................................5 Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.

Instruments and Controls...........................................................................................................................69 Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.

Comfort and Convenience Features.......................................................................................................143 How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.

Before Driving .............................................................................................................................................243 What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.

Driving ...........................................................................................................................................................257 The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.

Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................283 The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.

Appearance Care.........................................................................................................................................343 Tips on cleaning and protecting your vehicle. Things to look for if your car ever needs body repairs.

Taking Care of the Unexpected...............................................................................................................351 This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.

Technical Information ...............................................................................................................................383 ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.

Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ......................................................................397 A summary of the warranties covering your new Honda, and how to contact us.

Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...............................................................................................................401 How to order manuals and other technical literature.

Index ................................................................................................................................................................. I

Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

This Owner’s Manual should be considereda permanent part of the vehicle, and shouldremain with the vehicle when it is sold.

The information and specifications includedin this publication were in effect at the timeof approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,Ltd. reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specifications ordesign at any time without notice andwithout incurring any obligation whatsoever.

This Owner’s Manual covers all models ofthe Odyssey. You may find descriptions ofequipment and features that are not on yourparticular model.

Si prefiere este Manual delPropietario en español,comuníquese con el concesionarioHonda.

POUR CLIENTS CANADIENAVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avezbesoin d’un Manuel du Conducteuren français, veuillez demander àvotre concessionnaire decommander le numéro de pièce38S0X640

Owner’s Identif ication

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

！

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new Honda. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manualhelps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Hondadealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique toyour Honda. Your Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will bepleased to answer any questions and concerns.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your Honda, otherproperty, or the environment.

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

Congratulations Your selection of a 2003 Honda Odyssey was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

Introduction

WARNING:

i

－－

－－

－

－

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

on the vehicle.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

These signal words mean:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

A Few Words About Safety

Safety LabelsSafety Messages

Safety SectionInstructions

Safety Headings

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

ii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

Your Vehicle at a Glance

2

INDICATOR LIGHTS

GAUGES

SHIFT LEVER HEATING AND COOLING SYSTEM

CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

REAR A/C CONTROL

GLOVE BOX

AUDIO SYSTEM/REAR ENTERTAINMENTSYSTEM

CENTER TABLEACCESSORYPOWER SOCKET

PARKING BRAKEPEDAL

FUEL FILLDOOR RELEASE

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

POWERDOOR LOCKSWITCHES

(P.71)

(P.78) (P.261)(P.144)

(P.152)

(P.166)

(P.100)

(P.169, 181, 201, 217)

(P.130)(P.138)(P.129)(P.245)

(P.246)

(P.123)

(P.124)

(P.92)

SEAT HEATERSWICH

＊

＊

To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.:

Your Vehicle at a Glance

3

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM

POWER SLIDINGDOOR SWITCHES

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

HAZARD WARNINGLIGHTS

DIGITAL CLOCK

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

LIGHT CONTROLSWITCH

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

CRUISECONTROL

HORN

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

CRUISECONTROL

MIRRORCONTROLS

PASSENGERAIRBAG CUTOFFINDICATOR(P.62)

(P.269)

(P.103)

(P.82/84)

(P.128)

(P.199) (P.88) (P.84/86)

(P.139)

(P.87)

(P.130)(P.87)

(P.235)

(P.235)

4

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat beltsproperly. It explains your Supple-mental Restraint System. And it tellsyou how to properly restrain infantsand children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8.........................................Airbags . 10

.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 11..........................Head Restraints . 11

..................................Door Locks . 11........Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 12

............................Protecting Adults . 13.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 13............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 15

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 16

5. Fasten and Position the Seat.....................................Belts . 17

....6. Adjust the Steering Wheel . 207. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 21.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 22...Additional Safety Precautions . 22

........................Protecting Children . 24All Children Must Be

...............................Restrained . 24Children Should Sit in the Back

...........................................Seat . 25The Passenger’s Front Airbag

.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 26If You Must Drive with Several

...................................Children . 28If a Child Requires Close

..................................Attention . 28...Additional Safety Precautions . 29

General Guidelines for Using...............................Child Seats . 30

.......................Protecting Infants . 34.........Protecting Small Children . 38.......Protecting Larger Children . 42

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 46

.............................Using LATCH . 48Additional Information About Your

.................................Seat Belts . 50..Seat Belt System Components . 50

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 50Automatic Seat Belt

.............................Tensionners . 52...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 53

Additional Information About Your.....................................Airbags . 54

........................SRS Components . 54How Your Front Airbags

.........................................Work . 55How Your Side Airbags

.........................................Work . 59How the SRS Indicator Light

.......................................Works . 59How the Side Airbag Cutoff

...........Indicator Light Works . 60How the Passenger Airbag

..........Cutoff Indicator Works . 62.............................Airbag Service . 64

...Additional Safety Precautions . 65.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 66

...................................Safety Labels . 67

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety 5

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed the greater therisk, but serious accidents can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual. (See page

.)

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance. (See page .)

Children are safest when they areproperly restrained in a back seat,not the front seat. A child who is toosmall for a seat belt must be properlyrestrained in a child safety seat. (Seepage .)

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbagssupplement seat belts, but airbagsare designed to inflate only in amoderate to severe frontal collision.So even though your vehicle isequipped with airbags, make sureyou and your passengers alwayswear your seat belts, and wear themproperly. (See page .)17

24

10

288


Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Restrain All Children

Don’t Drink and Drive

6

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.Some safety features do not requireany action on your part. Theseinclude a strong steel frameworkthat forms a safety cage around thepassenger compartment; front andrear crush zones that are designed tocrumple and absorb energy during acrash; a collapsible steering column;and seat belt tensioners thatautomatically tighten the front seatbelts in the event of a crash.

CONTINUED


Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

7

(1)

(2)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)

(7)

(8)

(8)(7) (9)

(10)

(1) Safety Cage

(2) Crush Zones

(3) Seats & Seat-Backs

(4) Head Restraints

(5) Collapsible Steering Column

(6) Seat Belts

(7) Front Airbags

(8) Side Airbags

(9) Front Seat Belt Tensioners

(10) Door Locks

These safety features are designedto reduce the severity of injuries in acrash. However, you and yourpassengers can’t take full advantageof these safety features unless youremain sitting in a proper positionand

In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

For your safety, and the safety ofyour passengers, your vehicle isequipped with seat belts in all seatingpositions.

Your seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your seatbelts.

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.


Seat Belts

always wear your seat beltsproperly.

Why Wear Seat Belts


8

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag, andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wearyour seat belt, and make sure youwear it properly.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

When properly worn, seat belts:

What you should do:



Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, evenif you have airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard.

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

To do their job, airbags mustinflate with tremendous force andspeed. So while airbags help savelives, they can cause minor injuries,or more serious or even fatalinjuries if occupants are notproperly restrained or sittingproperly.

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact.

Your vehicle has a SupplementalRestraint System (SRS) with dual-stage, dual-threshold front airbags tohelp protect the heads and chests ofthe driver and a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe frontalcollision.

What you should do:

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, rollovers, or minorfrontal or side collisions.

Airbags can pose serious hazards.

Airbags


Driver and Passenger Safety10

Head restraints can help protect youfrom whiplash and other injuries. Formaximum protection, the back ofyour head should rest against thecenter of the head restraint.

Reclining a seat-back too far reducesthe seat belt’s effectiveness andincreases the chance that the seat’soccupant will slide under the seatbelt in a crash and be seriouslyinjured.

Move the frontseats as far back as possible, andkeep adjustable seat-backs in anupright position whenever thevehicle is moving.

Your vehicle’s seats are designed tokeep you in a comfortable, uprightposition so you can take fulladvantage of the protection offeredby seat belts and the energyabsorbing materials in the seats.

How you adjust your seats and seat-backs can also affect your safety. Forexample, sitting too close to thesteering wheel or dashboardincreases the risk of you or yourpassenger being injured by strikingthe inside of the vehicle, or by aninflating airbag.

Keeping your doors locked reducesthe chance of being thrown out ofthe vehicle during a crash. It alsohelps prevent occupants fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out, and outsiders fromunexpectedly opening your doors.

Seats & Seat-Backs

Head Restraints

Door LocksWhat you should do:



To make sure you and yourpassengers get the maximumprotection from your vehicle’s safetyfeatures, check the following eachtime before you drive away:

Any infant or small child isproperly restrained in a child seatin a back seat (see page ).

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in severecrashes, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

Front seat occupants are sittingupright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel anddashboard (see page ).

Seat-backs are upright (see page).

Head restraints are properlyadjusted (see page ).

All doors and the tailgate areclosed and locked (see page ).

All cargo is properly stored orsecured (see page ).

All adults, and children who haveoutgrown child safety seats, arewearing their seat belts andwearing them properly (see page

).

24

13

15

16

13

253

17

Pre-Drive Safety Checklist



The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver and other adultoccupants.

These instructions also apply tochildren who have outgrown childseats and are large enough to wearlap/shoulder belts. (See page forimportant additional guidelines onhow to properly protect largerchildren.)

Your vehicle has a door and tailgatemonitor light on the instrumentpanel to indicate when a specificdoor or the tailgate is not tightlyclosed.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors andtailgate are closed and locked.

For security, locked doors canprevent an outsider fromunexpectedly opening a door whenyou come to a stop.

See page for how to lock thedoors.

For safety, locking the doors reducesthe chance that a passenger,especially a child, will open a doorwhile the vehicle is moving andaccidentally fall out. It also reducesthe chance of someone being thrownout of the vehicle during a crash.

Any driver who sits too close to thesteering wheel is at risk of beingseriously injured or killed by strikingthe steering wheel or from beingstruck by an inflating front airbagduring a crash.

42

92CONTINUED

Introduction Adjust the Front SeatsClose and Lock the Doors1. 2.

Protecting Adults


See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

Most shorter drivers can get farenough away from the steeringwheel and still reach the pedals.However, if you are concerned aboutsitting too close, we recommend thatyou investigate whether some typeof adaptive equipment may help.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversadjust the seat so the center of thechest is at least 10 inches (25 cm)away from the center of the steeringwheel. Also make sure your frontseat passenger moves the seat as farto the rear as possible.

To reduce the chance of injury, wearyour seat belt properly, sit uprightwith your back against the seat, andmove the seat away from thesteering wheel to the farthestdistance that allows you to maintainfull control of the vehicle.

110

Protecting Adults


Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

See page for how to adjust seat-backs.

A front passenger should also adjustthe seat-back to an upright position,but as far from the dashboard aspossible. A passenger who sits tooclose to the dashboard could beinjured if the front airbag inflates.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel. If yousit too close to the steering wheel,you could be injured if the frontairbag inflates.

111

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

Protecting Adults


Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position and sit wellback in the seat.

Before driving, make sure everyonewith an adjustable head restraint hasproperly positioned the headrestraint. The restraint should bepositioned so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecenter of the restraint. A tallerperson should adjust the restraint ashigh as possible.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

115


Protecting Adults

Adjust the Head Restraints4.

16

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

CONTINUED

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Also checkthat the belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

If necessary, pull up on the shoulderbelt again to remove any slack fromthe shoulder belt, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.


Protecting Adults

Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.

Using a Lap/Shoulder Belt(Except the center position of thethird row)

17

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

The front seats and middle row seatshave adjustable seat belt anchors. Toadjust the height of a seat beltanchor, press the release button andslide the anchor up or down asneeded (it has four positions).

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

Unlatch the metal plate of theshoulder belt from the anchoron the ceiling and extend thebelt by pulling the metal plate.


Protecting Adults

Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

Using the Lap/Shoulder Belt in theCenter Position of the Third Row

18

RELEASEBUTTON

METAL PLATE

CONTINUED

Attach the metal hook on the edge ofthe shoulder belt to the metal loopon the latch plate of the lap beltmarked CENTER. Make sure theshoulder belt is securely attachedand it is not twisted. A twisted beltcan cause serious injuries in a crash.

Insert the latch plate of the lap beltinto the buckle marked CENTER. Ifthe belt is too short, hold the latchplate at a right angle and pull on theplate to extend the belt. Then insertthe latch plate into the buckle, andtug on the lap and shoulder belts tomake sure the belt is securelylatched.

Position the lap belt as low aspossible across your hips, thenpull on the loose end of the lapbelt for a snug but comfortablefit. This lets your strong pelvicbones take the force of a crashand reduces the chance ofinternal injuries.

Protecting Adults


METALHOOK

LATCH PLATE

If necessary, pull up on the shoulderbelt again to remove any slack fromthe shoulder belt, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to workas it should, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Anyone using a seat belt that isnot working properly can beseriously injured or killed. Have yourHonda dealer check the belt as soonas possible.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsystem and how to take care of yourbelts. Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,

so that the wheel points toward yourchest, not toward your face.

Pointing the steering wheel towardyour chest provides optimalprotection from the airbag.

See page for how to adjust thesteering wheel.

50

88

Protecting Adults


Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

If a Seat Belt Doesn’t Work Properly

No one shouldsit in a seat with an inoperative seatbelt.

Adjust the Steering Wheel6.

20

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured bystriking interior parts of the vehicle,or by being struck by an inflatingfront airbag. Being struck by aninflating side airbag can result inpossibly serious injuries.

Remember, to get the bestprotection from your vehicle’sairbags and other safety features,you must sit properly and wear yourseat belt properly.

Protecting Adults


Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

7.

21

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

Pregnant women should also situpright and as far back as possiblefrom the steering wheel ordashboard. This will reduce the riskof injuries to both the mother andher unborn child that can be causedby a crash or an inflating airbag.

Each time you have a check-up, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.

Because protecting the mother is thebest way to protect her unborn child,a pregnant woman should alwayswear a seat belt whenever she drivesor rides in a vehicle.

Remember to keep the lap portion ofthe belt as low as possible acrossyour hips.

All passengersmust sit in locked, upright seatsand be properly restrained by seatbelts.

A passenger who is notwearing a seat belt during a crashor emergency stop can be thrownagainst the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out ofthe vehicle.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Advice for Pregnant Women Additional Safety Precautions

Protecting Adults


Never let passengers ride in thecargo area or on top of a folded-down back seat.

Passengers should not stand up orchange seats while the vehicle ismoving.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

22

If yourhands or arms are close to theairbag covers in the center of thesteering wheel and on top of thedashboard, they could be injured ifthe airbags inflate.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canseverely compromise theprotective capability of the seatbelt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thevehicle and hurt someone.

Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG,’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard, couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the car and hurtsomeone.

This could make the driver’sseat position sensor or the frontpassenger’s seat weight sensorsineffective.

This couldcause problems with the driver’sseat position sensor or the frontpassenger’s seat weight sensors.

Protecting Adults


Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a front door.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not modify the front seats.

Do not place any items underthe front seats.

23

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many parents and otheradults may not know how toprotect young passengers. (See page

.)So if you have children, or if you everneed to drive with a grandchild orother children in your vehicle, besure to read this section.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be restrainedwhenever they ride in a vehicle.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof death of children ages 12 andunder.

(See page .)

30

42

properly

All Children Must Be Restrained

Any child who is too small to wear aseat belt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat.

A larger child should always berestrained with a seat belt, and use abooster, if needed.

Protecting Children


Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt.

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in theback seat, not the front seat. TheNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

In a back seat, children are lesslikely to be injured by striking hardinterior parts during a collision orhard braking. Also, children cannotbe injured by an inflating airbagwhen they ride in the back.During a

crash, the belt could press deepinto the child and cause veryserious injuries.

If you are not wearing aseat belt in a crash, you could bethrown forward into thedashboard and crush the child.

If you are wearing a seat belt, thechild can be torn from your armsduring a crash. For example, ifyour vehicle crashes into a parkedvehicle at 30 mph (48 km/h), a20-lb (9 kg) infant will become a600-lb (275 kg) force, and you willnot be able to hold on.

Protecting Children


Children Should Sit in the BackSeat

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand an infant or child.

Additional Precautions to ParentsNever hold an infant or child onyour lap.

25

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

With an advanced airbag system, thefront passenger’s airbag is turned offif sensors detect a total weight ofless than about 65 lbs (30 kg) in theseat, and the ‘‘Passenger AirbagCutoff’’ indicator is turned on. (Seepage for additional information onhow the passenger’s airbag works.)

Even if the passenger’s front airbagis turned off, we stronglyrecommend that infants, smallchildren, and larger children rideproperly restrained in a back seatwhere they will be safer.

To help prevent airbag-causeddeaths and injuries to children, thisvehicle has an advanced airbagsystem.

57

Protecting Children


The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks

26

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard andon the driver’s and front passenger’svisors. Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.

To remind you of the front airbaghazards, your vehicle has warninglabels on the driver’s and frontpassenger’s visors. Please read andfollow the instructions on theselabels.

U.S. Models Canadian Models

Protecting Children


Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Your vehicle has two rows of backseats where children can be properlyrestrained.

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear a seat beltproperly (see page ).

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren (when carpooling forexample), and a child must ride infront:

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards fromthe passenger’s front airbag, andpaying close attention to a childdistracts the driver from theimportant tasks of driving, placingboth of you at risk.

If a child requires physical attentionor frequent visual contact, westrongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in a backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

42

13

21

17

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

Protecting Children


Using this feature willprevent children from opening thedoors and accidentally falling out(see page ).

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous. Forexample, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Andchildren left alone with the key inthe ignition can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.Using this feature

will prevent children fromoperating the doors accidentally(see page ).

Children who play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside thevehicle. Teach your children not toplay in or around vehicles.

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignition,and open the tailgate, which canlead to accidental injury or death.

98

104

Protecting Children


Additional Safety PrecautionsUse childproof door locks toprevent children from opening thedoors.

Do not leave children alone in yourvehicle.

Use the power sliding door mainswitch to prevent children fromopening and closing the rearsliding doors.

Lock all doors and the tailgatewhen your vehicle is not in use.

Keep vehicle keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

29

The following pages give generalguidelines for selecting and installingchild seats for infants and smallchildren.

To provide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Children up to about oneyear old should be restrained in arear-facing, reclining child seat. Onlya rear-facing seat provides theproper support to protect an infant’shead, neck, and back. See page

for additional information onprotecting infants.

A child who is toolarge for a rear-facing child seat, andwho can sit up without support,should be restrained in a forward-facing child seat. See page foradditional information on protectingsmall children.

The child seat shouldmeet Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213)or Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213 (CMVSS 213). Lookfor the manufacturer’s statementof compliance on the boxes.

38

34

Protecting Children


General Guidelines for UsingChild Seats

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

Infants: Small Children:The child seat should meet safetystandards.

1.

2.

30

CONTINUED

Due to variations in the design ofchild seats, vehicle seats, and seatbelts, all child seats will not fit allvehicle seating positions.

However, Honda is confident thatone or more child seat models can fitand be properly installed in allrecommended seating positions inyour vehicle.

Before purchasing a child seat, werecommend that parents test thechild seat in the specific vehicleseating position (or positions) wherethey intend to use the seat. If apreviously purchased child seat doesnot fit, you may need to buy adifferent one that will fit.

Your vehicle has lower anchorsinstalled for use with LATCH(Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren) - compatible child seats.For more information, see page .48

Protecting Children


The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

3.

31

This page briefly summarizesHonda’s recommendations on whereto place rear-facing and forward-facing child seats in your vehicle.

Recommended positions.Properly secure a rear-facing childseat (see page ).

Recommendedpositions. Properly secure a front-facing child seat (see page ).

To help prevent airbag-causeddeaths and injuries to children,this vehicle has an advancedairbag system.

With this system, the frontpassenger’s airbag is turned offif sensors detect a total weightof less than about 65 lbs (30 kg)in the seat.

Even if the front passenger’sairbag is turned off, we stronglyrecommend that infants andsmall children ride properlyrestrained in a back seat wherethey will be safer.

Not recommended. Ifa small child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position and secure a front-facing child seat with the seat belt(see page ).

Never in the front seat, dueto the front airbag hazard. Notrecommended.

39

35

39

Placing a Child Seat Front Passenger’s Seat

Back SeatsInfants:

Small children:

Small children:

Infants:

Protecting Children


Airbags Pose SeriousRisks to Children

32

After selecting a proper child seat,and a good position to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be thrown out of the seat in acrash and be seriously injured.

However, a child seat does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ In some vehiclesor seating positions, it may bedifficult to install a child seat so thatit does not move at all. Some side-to-side or back-and-forth movement canbe expected and should not reducethe child seat’s effectiveness.

When you are not using a child seat,either remove it and store it in a safeplace, or make sure it is properlysecured. An unsecured child seat canbe thrown around the vehicle duringa crash or sudden stop and injuresomeone.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly securedin the desired seating position.

To provide security during normaldriving maneuvers as well as duringa collision, we recommend thatparents secure a child seat as firmlyas possible.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

All child seats aredesigned to be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. Some child seatscan be secured to the vehicle’sLATCH anchorage system instead.A child whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash. See pages

, and for instructions onhow to properly secure child seatsin this vehicle.

39 4835

Installing a Child Seat Secure the child in the child seat.

Storing a Child Seat

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

1.

2.

3.

Protecting Children


Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

An infant must be restrained in arear-facing child seat until the childreaches the seat maker’s weight orheight limit and is at least one yearold.

We strongly recommend placing arear-facing child seat in a back seat,not the front. Even with advancedairbags, which can automaticallyturn the passenger’s front airbag off(see page ), a back seat is thesafest place for an infant.

If an infant must be closely watched,have another adult sit in a back seatnext to the baby.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

62

Protecting Infants

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Protecting Children


Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

With the child seat in the desiredback seating position, route thebelt through the child seataccording to the seat maker’sinstructions, then insert the latchplate into the buckle.

The lap/shoulder belts in the outerback seats have a lockingmechanism that must be activated tosecure a child seat.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to secure a rear-facing child seat with this type ofseat belt.

See page for how to secure a rear-facing child seat in the centerposition on the third seat with the lappart of the lap/shoulder belt.

For tips on installing a rear-facingchild seat with either type of seatbelt, see page .

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front-seat passenger frommoving the seat as far back asrecommended (see page ). Or itmay prevent them from locking theseat-back in the desired uprightposition (see page ).

In either case, we recommend thatyou place the child seat in anotherback seating position, or leave theaffected seat unoccupied. If theproblem cannot be solved, you maywish to get a smaller rear-facingchild seat.

If you have a child seat designed tobe attached to the vehicle’s LATCHanchorage system, follow theinstructions on page .

1.

13

15

37

48

37

CONTINUED

Installing a Rear-Facing Child Seatwith a Lap/Shoulder Belt

Protecting Children


To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat, whilepulling up on the belt.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

4.

3.

2. 5.

Protecting Children


For proper protection, an infant mustride in a reclined, or semi-reclinedposition. To determine the properreclining angle, check with the baby’sdoctor or follow the seat maker’srecommendations.

To achieve the desired recliningangle, it may help to put a rolled uptowel under the toe of the child seat,as shown.

Then pull hard on the loose end ofthe belt to remove the any slack (itmay help to put weight on the childseat while pulling on the belt).Finally, follow instruction number 5on page to verify that the childseat is secured.

To install a rear-facing child seat inthe center position of the third seat,use the lap part of the lap/shoulderbelt. Follow instruction number 1 onpage for routing and latching theseat belt.

35

36

Protecting Children


Rear-Facing Child Seat InstallationTips

Installing a Rear-Facing Child Seat inthe Center Position of the Third Seat

37

We also recommend that a smallchild stay in the child seat as long aspossible, until the child reaches theweight or height limit for the seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

A child at least one year old who cansit up without support, and who fitswithin the child seat maker’s weightand height limits, should berestrained in a forward-facing,upright child seat.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front. Even withadvanced airbags, which canautomatically turn the passenger’sfront airbag off (see page ), aback seat is the safest place for asmall child.

If an child must be closely watched,have another adult sit in a back seatnext to the child.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle, and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

62

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Protecting Children


The lap/shoulder belts in the outerback and front passenger seatingpositions have a locking mechanismthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to secure aforward-facing child seat with thistype of seat belt.

See page for how to secure aforward-facing child seat in thecenter position on the third seat withthe lap part of the lap/shoulder belt.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle, and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

If you have a child seat designed tobe attached to the vehicle’s LATCHanchorage system, follow theinstructions on page .

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

1.41

48

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt

Protecting Children


Improperly placing a forward-facing child seat in the frontseat can result in serious injuryor death if the front airbagsinflate.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible and properly restrainthe child.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure. Itmay help to put weight on thechild seat, or push on the back ofthe seat, while pulling up on thebelt.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor (you might hear aclicking noise as the belt retracts).

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked andyou will need to repeat these steps.

4.2.

3.

Protecting Children


To deactivate the lockingmechanism in order to remove achild restraint system, unlatch thebuckle, unroute the seat belt, and letthe belt fully retract.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

To install a forward-facing child seatin the center position of the thirdseat, use the lap part of the lap/shoulder belt. Follow instructionnumber 1 on page for routing andlatching the seat belt.

5.

39

CONTINUED

Installing a Child Seat in the CenterPosition of the Third Seat

Protecting Children


Then pull hard on the loose end ofthe belt to remove the any slack (itmay help to put weight on the childseat while pulling on the belt).Finally, follow instruction number 5on page to verify that the childseat is secured.

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in the back seat on abooster and wear a lap/shoulder belt.

We recommend that the child use abooster seat until the child is tallenough to use the seat belt without abooster.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in the front seat.

41

Protecting Larger Children

Protecting Children


Allowing a larger child to sitimproperly in the front seat canresult in injury or death if thepassenger’s front airbag inflates.

If a larger child must sit in front,make sure the child moves theseat as far back as possible,uses a booster seat if needed,and wears the seat belt properly.

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childsit in a rear seat, all the way backagainst the seat, and put on the seatbelt. Follow the instructions on page

. Then check how the belt fits.

If the shoulder part of the belt restsover the child’s collarbone andagainst the center of the chest, andthe lap belt rests over the child’shipbones and touches the tops of thethighs as shown, the child isprobably big enough to wear the seatbelt.

However, if the shoulder belttouches or crosses the child’s neck,or if the lap belt crosses the child’sstomach, the child needs to use abooster seat.

This could result in serious neck andinternal injuries during a crash.

If they do, they couldbe very seriously injured in a crash.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt, severelycompromise the protective capabilityof the seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

This could causevery serious injuries during a crash.It also increases the chance that thechild will slide under the belt in acrash and be injured.

17

CONTINUED

Checking Seat Belt Fit Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck or over the stomach.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on a seatbelt.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the back orunder the arm.

Protecting Children


The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

We strongly recommend that a childwho used a booster ride in a backseat, not the front. Even if thepassenger’s front airbag is off, aback seat is the safest place for thechild.

Whichever style you select, followthe booster seat maker’s instructions.

If a child who uses a booster mustride in front, move the vehicle seatas far to the rear as possible, and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of the ears areeven with the top of the seat-back. Achild of this height should be tallenough to use the lap/shoulder beltwithout a booster.

Even then, the child may still need touse a booster seat. Note that somestates now require children to useboosters until they reach a certainage and/or weight. Be sure to checkcurrent laws in the state or stateswhere you intend to drive.

If the passenger’s front airbag is on,and it inflates in a moderate tosevere frontal collision, the airbagcan cause serious injuries to a childwho is unrestrained, improperlyrestrained, sitting too close to theairbag, or out of position.

The side airbag also poses risks. Ifany part of a larger child’s body is inthe path of a deploying airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

Even with advanced front airbags,the back seat is the safest place for achild of any age or size.

When Can a Larger Child Sit in FrontUsing a Booster Seat

Protecting Children


If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manualand make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly positioned and secured.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit over the hips, chest, andshoulder (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,the child should not sit in the front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in thefront, there are other importantfactors you should consider.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

Remind the child not to leantoward the door.

17 42

Physical Size

Maturity

Protecting Children


Second Seat Installation:

Lift the head restraint, then routethe tether strap over the seat-backbetween the legs of the headrestraint.

Your vehicle has tether anchoragepoints for a tether-style child seat tobe installed on the second or thirdrow as shown.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable. (Tethers are required inCanada.)

Each second row bucket seat has atether anchorage point on theunderside of the seat cushion.

Using Child Seats with Tethers


Protecting Children

46

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT

Third Seat Installation:

If you are not sure how to install thetether, or you need mountinghardware, contact your Honda dealer.

To attach the tether to the child seat,follow the child seat maker’sinstructions.

If a torque wrench was not used, seeyour Honda dealer as soon aspossible to verify proper installation.

When installing tether hardware,make sure the toothed washer is onthe bottom of the bolt. Tighten thebolt to:

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchorage point as shown inthe illustration, then tighten thestrap according to the child seatmaker’s instructions. Make sure thestrap is not twisted.

There are three anchorage points onthe tailgate sill. The tether hardwareis installed on the center anchoragepoint.

If you want to use either of theoutside anchorage points, removethe tether hardware from the centeranchorage point, remove the plugfrom the anchorage point you aregoing to use with a small flat-tippedscrewdriver, then install the tetherhardware.

Protecting Children


16 lbf·ft (22 N·m , 2.2 kgf·m)

Put the child seat in a second rowvehicle seat and attach the childseat to the lower anchorsaccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions.

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for Children) at the secondrow seats. The lower anchors arelocated between the seat-back andseat bottom and are to be used onlywith a child seat designed for usewith LATCH.

Make sure there are no foreignobjects around the anchors.Foreign objects could get in theway of a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Move the seat belt buckle or seatbelt tongue away from the loweranchors.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

The exact location of each loweranchorage is marked with a smallbutton above the lower anchoragepoint.

1.

2.

3.

Using LATCH

Protecting Children


RIGID TYPELOWERANCHORS

MARKS

Follow the child seat maker’sinstructions for any additionaladvice on adjusting or tighteningthe fit.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchorage point, andtighten the strap according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.Make sure the strap is not twisted.

This symbol on rear or forwardfacing child seats or boostercushions indicates the presence ofLATCH compatible hardware.

4. 5.

6.

Protecting Children


Lower Universal AnchorageSystem Symbol

49

FLEXIBLE TYPE

To unlock the belt, push the redPRESS button on the buckle.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched.

Guide the belt across your body sothat it retracts completely. Afterexiting the vehicle, be sure the beltis out of the way and will not getclosed in the door.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

Your vehicle has two types of lap/shoulder belts. The center positionof the third seat has a combination ofa lap belt and a shoulder belt. Formaximum safety, they are designedto be used together.

All other seating positions have aone-piece lap/shoulder belt. Thisseat belt goes over your shoulder,across your chest and across yourhips.

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all seven seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

The seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your belts.If the driver’s seat belt is notfastened before the ignition is turnedON (II), the light will come on and abeeper will also sound. The beeperwill stop after a few seconds, but thelight will stay on until the driver’sseat belt is fastened.

Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts


The combination lap belt andshoulder belt in the center positionof the third seat goes over yourshoulder, across your chest and overyour hips. The shoulder belt has anemergency locking retractor thatworks in combination with the lapbelt.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s and the center positionof the third seat have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat. (Seepages and for instructions onhow to secure child seats with thistype of seat belt.)

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the belt, pull it out only asfar as needed.

See page for instructions on howto wear the lap/shoulder beltproperly.

To fasten the seat belt, unlatch themetal plate of the shoulder belt fromthe anchor on the ceiling and extendthe belt by pulling the metal plate.

Attach the metal hook on the edge ofthe shoulder belt to the metal loopon the latch plate of the lap beltmarked CENTER, then tug on theshoulder belt to make sure it issecurely attached.

Insert the latch plate of the lap beltinto the buckle marked CENTER,then tug on the lap belt to make surethe buckle is latched.

To unlock the belt, push the redPRESS button on the buckle anddetach the shoulder belt from the lapbelt.

See page for how to lengthen thelap belt, and how to properly positionthe lap and shoulder belts.

39

17

18

35



The tensioners are designed toactivate primarily in frontal collisions.The tensioners are independent ofthe airbag system, so they can beactivated during a collision thatmight not cause the airbags todeploy. In this case, the airbagswould not be needed but theadditional seat belt tension can behelpful.

The tensioners will be activated in acollision severe enough to cause thefront airbags to inflate.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled in the normalway.

The SRS indicator light willcome on if there is a

problem with your automatic seatbelt tensioners (see page ).

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in place.

59

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners



For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthat the lap/shoulder belts retracteasily. Any belt not in good conditionor not working properly will notprovide good protection and shouldbe replaced as soon as possible.

For information on how to clean yourseat belts, see page .

Automatic seat belt tensioners thatdeployed during a crash must bereplaced.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed.

Honda provides a lifetime warrantyon seat belts. Honda will repair orreplace any seat belt component thatfails to function properly duringnormal use. Please see your

booklet fordetails.

347

HondaWarranty Information

Seat Belt Maintenance



U.S. Models

53

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

Your Supplemental Restraint System(SRS) includes:

Automatic seat belt tensioners(see page ).

Two front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG.’’

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe frontalcollision.

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, and driver andpassenger seat belt use when theignition is ON (II).

52

SRS Components

Additional Information About Your Airbags


(1) Driver’s Airbag(2) Front Passenger’s Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors(8) Front Sensor(9) Passenger Airbag Cutoff Indicator

(5) (9)

(2)

(8)

(3)

(7)

(4)

(4)

(1)

(5)

(6)

(7)

CONTINUED

During a frontal crash, your seatbelts help restrain your lower bodyand torso. Your airbag provides acushion to help restrain and protectyour head and chest.

Since both airbags use the samesensors, both airbags normallyinflate at the same time. However, itis possible for only one airbag toinflate.

This can occur when the severity ofa collision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.If you ever have a moderate to

severe frontal collision, the sensorswill detect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration. If the rate ofdeceleration is high enough, thecontrol unit will instantly inflate thefront airbags.

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-stage, dual-threshold airbags to helpreduce the chance of airbag-causedinjuries.

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the driver’s seat positionand adjusts the inflation andtiming of the driver’s airbag (seepage ).

Front passenger’s weight sensorsthat monitor the weight on theseat. These prevent the passenger’sairbag from inflating if the weightis less than about 65 lbs (30 kg)(see page ).

An indicator light on theinstrument panel that alerts you toa possible problem with thesystem (see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

56

57

59



How Your Front Airbags Work

55

The total time for inflation anddeflation is approximately one-tenthof a second, so fast that mostoccupants are not aware that theairbags deployed until they see themlying in their laps.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

Your vehicle has a driver’s seatposition sensor as a part of theadvanced airbag system. The sensoris located under the driver’s seat.This sensor monitors the driver’sseat sliding position and sends theinformation to the control unit. If theseat is too far forward, the controlunit will control the inflation of thedriver’s airbag.

Do not put any cargo or metalobjects under the driver’s seat, anddo not cover the sensor withanything, including the rear seatpassenger’s feet.This will cause the sensor to workimproperly and will damage it.



Driver’s Seat Position Sensor

56

If there is a problem in the sensor,the SRS indicator in the instrumentpanel comes on. In this case, thedriver’s airbag will inflate normallyduring a crash regardless of thedriver’s seating position.

Your vehicle has front passenger’sweight sensors as a part of theadvanced airbag system. They arelocated under both of the frontpassenger’s seat rails. These sensorsmonitor the total weight on the seat.

If there is no passenger in the frontpassenger’s seat, the passengerairbag cutoff indicator does notcome on, however the system shutsoff the front passenger’s airbag.

If the total weight on the seat isabout 65 lbs (30 kg) or less, thesystem shuts off the front passenger’sairbag and the passenger airbagcutoff indicator comes on. It remindsyou that the front passenger’s airbagwill not inflate during a crash.

CONTINUED

Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors



The driver’s and front passenger’sseat sensors may not work properlyif:

Be careful not to spill any liquids.Spilled liquids could damage thesensors under the front seats.

If your vehicle sustains a severeimpact, have the driver’s seatposition sensor and the frontpassenger’s weight sensorsinspected by your Honda dealer.

You do not wear your seat beltproperly.

You do not sit upright and as farback as possible from the steeringwheel or the dashboard (see page

).

You do not secure the child seatproperly, and move the front seatas far back as possible.

For additional information on howyour airbags work, see the booklettitled

that came with yourowner’s manual.

For additional information on howyour airbags work, ask your dealerfor a copy of the booklet titled20

SRS: What You Need to KnowAbout Airbags

SRS:What You Need to Know About Airbags.



U.S.Owners

Canadian Owners

58

Your vehicle is equipped with sideairbags for the driver and a frontseat passenger. The airbags arestored in the outer edges of the frontseat-backs, and both are marked‘‘SIDE AIRBAG.’’

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, the sensors willdetect rapid deceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

The SRS indicator lightalerts you to a potential

problem with your front airbags andautomatic seat belt tensioners.

This light will also alert you to apotential problem with your sideairbags, passenger’s side airbagautomatic cutoff system (see page

), or the driver’s seat positionsensor and the front passenger’sweight sensors (see pages and

).

When you turn the ignition ON (II),this indicator will light briefly thengo out. This tells you that the systemis working properly.

60

5762

CONTINUED


How Your Side Airbags Work How the SRS Indicator LightWorks


59

If the light comes on at any othertime, or does not come on at all, youshould have the system checked byyour dealer. For example:

If the light stays on after theengine starts.

If the light comes on or flashes onand off while you drive.

This light alerts you thatthe passenger’s side airbag

has been automatically shut off.

Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in the front, thissystem is designed to shut off theside airbag if a child leans sidewaysand the child’s head is in the sideairbag deployment path.

If the SRS indicator light does notcome on after you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II).

If you see any of these indications,your front or side airbags may notdeploy, your passenger’s side airbagautomatic cutoff system may notwork properly, your seat belttensioners may not work, or thesensors under the front seats maynot work properly when you needthem. See your Honda dealer as soonas possible.

It does not mean there is a problemwith your side airbags. It means thatthe side airbag cutoff system hasactivated to prevent the side airbagfrom deploying.

To reduce the risk of injury from aninflating side airbag, your vehicle hasan automatic cutoff system for thepassenger’s side airbag.



How the Side Airbag CutoffIndicator Light Works

60

Ignoring the SRS indicator lightcan result in serious injury ordeath if the airbags, cutoffsystem, or tensioners do notwork properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS light alerts you to apotential problem.

If a small-statured adult leanssideways, or larger adult slouchesand leans sideways into thedeployment path of the side airbag,the system may also shut off the sideairbag.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the indicator should lightbriefly and go out (see page ). If itdoesn’t light, stays on, or comes onwhile driving without a passenger inthe front seat, have the systemchecked.

If the side airbag cutoff indicatorlight comes on, you should have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the deploymentpath of the side airbag, the systemwill turn the airbag back on and thelight will go out.

73



This light alerts you that the frontpassenger’s airbag is shut off.

If the light is on, it does not meanthere is a problem with the frontpassenger’s airbag. If there is aproblem in the weight sensors, theSRS indicator in the instrumentpanel comes on. In this case, thepassenger airbag cutoff indicatorturns off, and the front passenger’sairbag will inflate during a crash.

To reduce the chance of airbag-caused injuries, the system shuts offthe front passenger’s airbag whenthe total weight on the frontpassenger’s seat is about 65 lbs(30 kg) or less. The passengerairbag cutoff indicator comes on toremind you the front passenger’sairbag will not inflate during a crash.

If there is no passenger in the frontpassenger’s seat, this indicator doesnot come on, however the systemshuts off the front passenger’sairbag.

If this indicator comes on with nopassenger in the front passenger’sseat, or with an adult in the seat,there may be a problem in theadvanced airbag system. Have thevehicle checked by the dealer assoon as possible.

This indicator may come on or offrepeatedly, if some objects are puton the front passenger’s seat, or ifthe temperature of the vehicle’sinterior changes suddenly when adoor is opened.



How the Passenger Airbag CutoffIndicator Works

62

PASSENGER AIRBAG CUTOFFINDICATOR

CONTINUED

To ensure the front passenger’s seatweight sensors keep the passenger’sairbag activated when an adult orlarge child weighing about 65 lbs/30 kg or more sits in the frontpassenger’s seat, do not allowanything to decrease the weight onthe seat. This includes, but is notlimited to, these examples:

Front passenger’s seat forciblymoved backward into luggage orother items placed behind it.

Front passenger’s seat forciblypushed up by luggage or otheritems placed under it.

Rear passengers pushing up thefront passenger’s seat with theirfeet.

If a passenger is tall enough to usethe seat belt and sit properly, but thepassenger airbag cutoff indicatorcomes on and off repeatedly, werecommend that the passenger sitsin a rear seat. If the passenger mustsit on the front seat, move the seatas far to the rear as possible, havethe passenger sit upright, and makesure the seat belt is worn securely.

To ensure the front passenger’s seatweight sensors keep the passenger’sairbag deactivated when an infant orsmall child weighing about 65 lbs/30 kg or less sits in the frontpassenger’s seat, do not allowanything to increase the weight onthe seat. This includes, but is notlimited to, these examples:

Rear passengers pushing orpulling the front passenger’s seat-back or pushing the seat rails withtheir feet.

Heavy items placed in the frontpassenger’s seat-back pocket.



If the passenger airbag cutoffindicator does not light, or comes onand off repeatedly while a child seatis secured on the front passenger’sseat, remove the child seat, thensecure it on a rear seat.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the passenger airbag cutoffindicator will light briefly then go out.This tells you that the system isworking properly.

The indicator may come on or off afew seconds later if the weight onthe front passenger’s seat changes.

Your front and side airbag systemsare virtually maintenance-free, andthere are no parts you can safelyservice. However, you must haveyour vehicle serviced if:

Anyairbag that has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit, automatic seat belttensioners, and other related parts.Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by a Honda dealer or aknowledgeable body shop.

Take your vehicle toan authorized Honda dealer assoon as possible. If you ignore thisindication, the airbags might notinflate when you need them.



Airbag Service

Your airbags ever inflate.

The SRS indicator light alerts youto a problem.

64

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

If rain or spilled watersoaks into a seat-back, it canprevent the side airbag systemfrom working properly.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor andthe front passenger’s weightsensors ineffective.

Improperlyreplacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your sideairbags from inflating during acollision.

This could make the driver’s seatposition sensor and the frontpassenger’s weight sensorsineffective.

See page for further informationand precautions relating to yourairbags.

first contact AmericanHonda at 800-999-1009.

252Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not expose the front seat-backsto water.

Do not place any items under thefront seats.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consulting aHonda dealer.

Do not modify the front seats.

If it is necessary to modify anadvanced front airbag system toaccommodate a person withdisabilities,



Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. You shouldhave no problem with carbonmonoxide entering the vehicle innormal driving if you maintain yourvehicle properly.Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged the under-side.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

With the tailgate open, air flow canpull exhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetailgate open, open all the windowsand set the heating and coolingsystem/climate control system asshown below.

Select the Fresh Air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

If you must sit in your parked vehicle,even in an unconfined area, with theengine running, adjust the heatingand cooling system/climate controlsystem as follows:

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard


Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read, contact your Honda dealerfor a replacement.

U.S. models only

U.S. models

Canadian models

Safety Labels


RADIATOR CAP

SUN VISOR

HOOD

DASHBOARD

68

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour Honda. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 70...............................Indicator Lights . 71

.............................................Gauges . 78Controls Near the Steering

.......................................Wheel . 81...................................Headlights . 82

Automatic Lighting Off.....................................Feature . 83

............Daytime Running Lights . 83....Instrument Panel Brightness . 83

................................Turn Signals . 84

.....................Windshield Wipers . 84..................Windshield Washers . 86

Rear Window Wiper and.....................................Washer . 86

..........................Hazard Warning . 87.............Rear Window Defogger . 87

......Steering Wheel Adjustment . 88...............................Keys and Locks . 89

..............................................Keys . 89....................Immobilizer System . 90

............................Ignition Switch . 91......................Power Door Locks . 92

...................Remote Transmitter . 94..............Childproof Door Locks . 98

........................................Tailgate . 98..................................Glove Box . 100

...................Manual Sliding Doors . 101.....................Power Sliding Doors . 103

...............................................Seats . 109....................Passenger Seating . 109

......................Seat Adjustments . 110Driver’s Seat Manual Height

............................Adjustment . 112Driver’s Seat Power

..........................Adjustments . 113.........Driver’s Lumbar Support . 114

....................................Armrests . 115........................Head Restraints . 115

.....................Third Seat Access . 116Moving the Second Row

...........................Bucket Seat . 117Removing the Bucket Seats

................in the Second Row . 119Folding the Third Row

.........................‘‘Magic Seat’’ . 120..................................Seat Heaters . 123

............................Power Windows . 124...........................................Mirrors . 128

...............................Parking Brake . 129..................................Digital Clock . 130..................................Center Table . 130

.........................Beverage Holders . 132........................Sunglasses Holder . 134

........................................Sun Visor . 134................................Vanity Mirror . 135

.......................Rear Compartment . 135...............................Center Pocket . 136

...................................Coin Holder . 136

...................................Storage Box . 137......................................Coat Hook . 137

............Accessory Power Sockets . 138...............................Interior Lights . 139

Instruments and Controls

Instruments and Controls 69

Control Locations

Instruments and Controls70

MIRRORCONTROLS

DIGITAL CLOCK HEATING/COOLING CONTROLSCLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM

HOOD RELEASE HANDLEFUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE

(P.103) (P.128)(P.130)

(P.144)(P.152)

(P.166)

(P.169, 181, 201, 217)

(P.246)(P.245)

(P.123)

(P.124)

(P.92)

POWER SLIDINGDOOR SWITCHES

REAR A/CUNITCONTROL

AUDIO SYSTEM/REAR ENTERTAINMENTSYSTEM

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

DOOR LOCKSWITCHES

SEAT HEATERSWITCH

＊

＊

＊

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Indicator Lights


IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM INDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKESYSTEM INDICATOR

SIDE AIRBAGCUTOFFINDICATOR

LOW FUELINDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDER LIGHT

DOOR AND BRAKE LAMP MONITOR

POWER SLIDINGDOOR INDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

MAINTENANCE REQUIREDINDICATOR

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM INDICATOR

(P.74)

(P.74)

(P.80)

(P.77)

(P.76)

(P.73)

(P.74)

(P.72)

(P.73)

(P.77)

(P.73)(P.75)

(P.75)(P.371)

(P.72, 369)

(P.72, 370)

(P.234)

This light has two functions:

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch ON (II). Itis a reminder to check the parkingbrake. Driving with the parkingbrake not fully released candamage the brakes and tires.

If this light comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For completeinformation, see page .

The engine can be severely damagedif this light flashes or stays on whenthe engine is running. For completeinformation, see page .

See page .

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

If the indicator remains lit afteryou have fully released theparking brake while the engine isrunning, or if it comes on whiledriving, it can indicate a problemin the brake system. For completeinformation, see page .

1.

2.

371

369

370

373

Indicator Lights


Charging SystemIndicator

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Parking Brake and Brake SystemIndicator

72

U.S. Canada

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). It is areminder to you and your passengersto protect yourselves by fasteningthe seat belts. A beeper also soundsif you have not fastened your seatbelt.

If you do not fasten your seat belt,the beeper will stop after a fewseconds but the light stays on untilyou do. Both the light and the beeperstay off if you fasten your seat beltbefore turning on the ignition.

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates a potential problem withyour front airbags or automatic seatbelt tensioners. This light will alsoalert you to a potential problem withyour side airbags, passenger’s sideairbag automatic cutoff system,driver’s seat position sensor, or frontpassenger’s weight sensors. Forcomplete information, see page .

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates that the passenger’s sideairbag has automatically shut off.For complete information, see page

.60

59

Indicator Lights


Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Side Airbag CutoffIndicator

Seat Belt Reminder Light

73

This light normally comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch ON (II), and whenthe ignition switch is turned toSTART (III). If this light comes on atany other time, there is a problem inthe ABS. If this happens, take thevehicle to your dealer to have itchecked. With the light on, yourvehicle still has normal brakingability but no anti-lock. For completeinformation, see page .

This indicator has three functions:

This light also comes on when youturn the ignition ON (II) and goes offafter the engine starts. See page

for more information on theTCS.

If it comes on and stays on whenthe Traction Control System is on,it indicates that there is a problemin the TCS.

It flashes when the TCS isregulating wheelspin.

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the TractionControl System.

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch ON (II). It will then go off ifyou have inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blinkand the engine will not start (seepage ).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

1.

2.

3.

90

268

269

Indicator Lights


Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

Traction Control System(TCS) Indicator

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

74

U.S. Canada

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch ON (II). If it comes on at anyother time, there is a problem in thepower sliding door system. With thislight on, move the main switch onthe dashboard to the OFF position,and have the system checked byyour Honda dealer as soon aspossible. You can still open or closeeach sliding door manually. Formore information on the powersliding doors, see page .

The appropriate light comes on inthis display if the tailgate or any dooris not closed tightly. If a brake lightdoes not work, theindicator comes on when you pushthe brake pedal with the ignitionswitch ON (II).

A burned out brake light is a hazardwhen drivers behind you cannot tellyou are braking. Have your brakelights repaired right away.

All the lights in the monitor displaycome on when you turn the ignitionswitch ON (II). The lights go offafter the engine starts and thetailgate and all doors are closedtightly.

103

EX and EX-L models only

Power Sliding DoorIndicator

Door and Brake Lamp Monitor

Indicator Lights


BRAKE LAMP

This light comes on with the highbeam headlights. See page forinformation on the headlightcontrols.

On Canadian models, this indicatorcomes on with reduced brightnesswhen the Daytime Running Lights(DRL) are on (see page ).

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) withthe headlight switch off and theparking brake set. It should go off ifyou turn on the headlights or releasethe parking brake. If it comes on atany other time, it means there is aproblem with the DRL. There mayalso be a problem with the highbeam headlights.

The left or right turn signal lightblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the light does not blink orblinks rapidly, it usually means oneof the turn signal bulbs is burned out(see page ). Replace the bulb assoon as possible, since other driverscannot see that you are signaling.

When you turn on the HazardWarning switch, both turn signallights blink. All turn signals on theoutside of the vehicle should flash.

333

82

83

Canadian models only

High Beam Indicator ‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Indicator Lights


This lights when you set the cruisecontrol. See page for informationon operating the cruise control.

This light comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this light come on(see page ).

This light comes on as a reminderthat you must refuel soon.

306

235Canadian models only

Indicator Lights


Cruise Control Indicator Washer Level Indicator Low Fuel Indicator

77

U.S. Models

Canadian Models

This shows your speed in miles perhour (mph). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in kilometersper hour (km/h).

This shows your speed in kilometersper hour (km/h). The smaller innernumbers are the speed in miles perhour (mph).

The tachometer shows the enginespeed in revolutions per minute(rpm). To protect the engine fromdamage, never drive with thetachometer needle in the red zone.

The odometer shows the total dis-tance your vehicle has been driven.It measures miles in U.S. models andkilometers in Canadian models.It is illegal under U.S. federal law andCanadian provincial regulations todisconnect, reset, or alter theodometer with the intent to changethe number of miles or kilometersindicated.

Speedometer

Odometer

Tachometer

Gauges


TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE TEMPERATUREGAUGE

TRIP METER SELECT/RESET BUTTON

TRIP METERMAINTENANCEREQUIRED INDICATOR

ODOMETER

This shows how much fuel you have.It is most accurate when the vehicleis on level ground. It may showslightly more or less than the actualamount when you are driving oncurvy or hilly roads.

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom white mark to aboutthe middle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise to nearthe upper white mark. If it reachesthe red (Hot) mark, pull safely to theside of the road. Turn to page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem.

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays by pressing the Select/Reset button repeatedly. Each tripmeter works independently, so youcan keep track of two differentdistances.

To reset a trip meter, display it, andthen press and hold the Select/Resetbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0’’.

The needle returns to the bottomafter you turn off the ignition. Thegauge shows the fuel level readingimmediately after you turn theignition switch back ON (II).

366

Gauges


Trip Meter Temperature Gauge Fuel Gauge

79

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedulesfor Normal and Severe DrivingConditions on pages and .

For the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km)after the Maintenance RequiredIndicator is reset, it will come on fortwo seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II).

Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and7,500 miles (12,000 km) thisindicator will light for two secondswhen you first turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II), and then flash forten seconds.

If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000km) without having the scheduledmaintenance performed, thisindicator will remain on as a constantreminder.

Your dealer will reset this indicatorafter completing the scheduledmaintenance. If this maintenance isdone by someone other than yourHonda dealer, reset the indicator asfollows.

Turn off the engine.

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your vehicle in forscheduled maintenance.

Press and hold the select/resetbutton in the instrument panel,then turn the ignition switch ON(II).

Hold the button until the indicatorresets (approximately tenseconds).

1.

2.

3.

288 290

Gauges

Maintenance Required Indicator


MAINTENANCE REQUIREDINDICATOR SELECT/RESET BUTTON

＊

＊

The two levers on the steeringcolumn contain controls for drivingfeatures you use most often. The leftlever controls the turn signals,headlights, and high beams. Theright lever controls the windshieldwashers and wipers.

The switches for the hazard warninglights and rear window defogger arelocated to the right of the steeringcolumn.

The controls under the left air ventare for the TCS, the cruise control,the power sliding doors and thepower mirrors.

The tilt adjustment lever on theunderside of the steering columnallows you to tilt the steering wheel.

To use the horn, press the padaround the ‘‘H’’ logo.


Controls Near the Steering Wheel

81

POWER SLIDING DOOR(EX and EX-L models)

TRACTIONCONTROL SYSTEM

HAZARDWARNINGLIGHTS

PASSENGER AIRBAGCUTOFF INDICATOR

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

SHIFTLEVER

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

LIGHT CONTROLSWITCH

HORN

TILTADJUSTMENT

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

CRUISECONTROL

MIRRORCONTROL

If you leave the lights on with theignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)or LOCK (0), you will hear areminder chime when you open thedriver’s door.

To change between low beams andhigh beams, pull the turn signal leveruntil you hear a click, then let go.The blue high beam indicator willlight (see page ).

To flash the high beams, pull theturn signal lever back lightly, thenrelease it. The high beams will comeon and go off.

The high beams will stay on for aslong as you hold the lever back, nomatter what position the headlightswitch is in.

The rotating switch on the left levercontrols the lights. Turning thisswitch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turnson the parking lights, taillights,instrument panel lights, side-markerlights, and rear license plate light.Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights.

76



Headlights

82

The Automatic Lighting Off featureturns off the headlights, parkinglights, taillights, side marker lights,license plate lights and instrumentpanel lights within 15 seconds ofremoving the key from the ignitionswitch and closing the driver’s door.

The lights will turn on again whenyou unlock or open the driver’s door.If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightswill go off. With the driver’s dooropen, you will hear a lights-onreminder chime.

With the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) andrelease the parking brake. Theyremain on until you turn the ignitionoff, even if you set the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

The knob on the instrument panelcontrols the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights. Turn the knob toadjust the brightness.

This feature activates if you leavethe headlight switch in the or

position, remove the key, open,then close the driver’s door.If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightswitch on, but do not open the doorand get out, the lights will turn offafter 10 minutes.

On EX and EX-L models



Automatic Lighting Off Feature

Daytime Running Lights(Canadian Models)

Instrument Panel Brightness

83

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESSCONTROL KNOB

Signal a turn or lane change with thislever. Push down on the lever tosignal a left turn, and up to signal aright turn. If you push it up or downall the way, the turn signal continuesto blink even when you release thelever. It shuts off automatically asyou complete the turn.

To signal a lane change, push lightlyon the turn signal lever in the properdirection and hold it. The lever willreturn to the center position as soonas you release it.

The right lever controls the wind-shield wipers and washers. Therotary switch at the end of the leverhas three positions;

INT: intermittent: low speed: high speed

Turn Signals Windshield Wipers



84

TURN SIGNAL LEVER

To operate the wipers in mist mode,push the control lever down. Thewipers run at high speed until yourelease the lever. This gives you aquick way to clear the windshield.

In intermittent, the wipers operateevery few seconds. You can varyhow often the wipers sweep thewindshield by turning the INT TIMEring next to the rotary switch. Thesweep interval will change slightlywith speed; getting shorter as youdrive faster. In low speedintermittent and high speed driving,the wipers run continuously.

If you turn the INT TIME ring to theshortest delay, the wipers willchange from intermittent to lowspeed operation when vehicle speedexceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).



The rear window wiper switch islocated next to the windshield wiperswitch.

To clean the windshield, pull back onthe wiper control lever. The washersspray until you release the lever. Thewipers run at low speed while you’repulling the lever, then complete onemore sweep of the windshield afteryou release it.

To activate the rear windshield wiper,turn the switch ‘‘ON’’. If you turn theswitch ‘‘ON’’, the rear windshieldwiper swings twice and then willsweep the glass approximately everyseven seconds. If you wish to use thewiper and washer, turn and hold theswitch one position up from ‘‘ON’’.

The rear window washer uses thesame fluid reservoir as the wind-shield washer.

Rear Window Wiper and WasherWindshield Washers



Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The light abovethe button lights to show thedefogger is on. If you do not turn itoff, the defogger will shut itself offafter about 15 minutes. It also shutsoff when you turn off the ignition.You have to turn it on again whenyou restart the vehicle.

Push the button to the left of theclock to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all four outside turn signalsand both indicators in the instrumentpanel to flash. Use the hazardwarning lights if you need to park ina dangerous area near heavy traffic,or if your vehicle is disabled.

CONTINUED



Rear Window DefoggerHazard Warning

87

EX and EX-L models Vehicles with Navigaition System

See page for important safetyinformation about how to properlyposition the steering wheel.

20

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up and down.

Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

Move the steering wheel to thedesired position, making sure thewheel points toward your chest,not toward your face. Make sureyou can see the instrument panelgauges and the indicator lights.

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

To adjust the steering wheel upwardor downward:

The defogger wires on the inside ofthe rear window can be accidentallydamaged. When cleaning the glass,always wipe side to side.

3.

4.1.

2.



Steering Wheel Adjustment

88

LX model

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

Your vehicle comes with two masterkeys and a valet key.The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle:• Ignition• Doors• Glove Box• Tailgate

You should have received a keynumber plate with your keys. Youwill need this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Keepthe plate stored in a safe place. If youneed to replace a key, use onlyHonda-approved key blanks.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theImmobilizer System. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry them immedi-ately with a soft cloth.

The keys do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

The valet key works only in theignition, the door locks and thetailgate. You can keep the glove boxlocked when you leave your vehicleand the valet key at a parking facility.

Some models also come with tworemote transmitters; see page foran explanation of their operation.

94

Keys

Remote Transmitter

Keys and Locks


KEYNUMBERPLATE

MASTERKEYS(BLACK)

VALET KEY(GRAY)

The Immobilizer System protectsyour vehicle from theft. A properly-coded master or valet key must beused in the ignition switch for theengine to start. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used,the engine’s fuel system is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the Immobilizer Systemindicator should come on for a fewseconds, then go out. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0), remove the key, reinsertit, and turn the switch to ON (II)again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object is near theignition switch when you insert thekey. To make sure the systemrecognizes the key code:

Do not keep other immobilizerkeys on the same key ring.

Use a plastic or leather key fob,not metal.

Keep other keys away from yourvehicle’s key and the ignitionswitch while trying to start theengine.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your Honda dealer.

The Immobilizer System indicatorwill also blink several times whenyou turn the ignition switch from ON(II) to ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0).

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undriveable.

If you have lost your key and youcannot start the engine, contact yourHonda dealer.

Immobilizer System

Keys and Locks


－

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may sometimes makeit difficult to turn the key fromLOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turnthe steering wheel to the left or tothe right as you turn the key.

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To switch from ACCESSORY toLOCK, you must push the key inslightly as you turn it. The shift levermust also be in Park. The anti-theftlock will lock the steering columnwhen you remove the key.

The ignition switch is on the rightside of the steering column. It hasfour positions:• LOCK (0)• ACCESSORY (I)• ON (II)• START (III)

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

CONTINUED

LOCK (0)Ignition Switch

Keys and Locks


－

－

－ Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to ON (II) when you let go ofthe key.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. All featuresand accessories on the vehicle areusable. Several of the lights on theinstrument panel come on as a testwhen you turn the ignition switchfrom ACCESSORY to ON.

The engine will not start if theImmobilizer System does notrecognize the key’s coding (see page

).

You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper.

Each front door has a master doorlock switch. Either switch locks andunlocks all doors and the tailgate.Push the switch down to lock alldoors and the tailgate, and up tounlock them.

In this position,you can operate the audio systemand the accessory power sockets.

90

START (III) Power Door Locks

ON (II)

ACCESSORY (I)

Keys and Locks


MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Each front door has a lock tab on thetop. When you push down the locktab on the driver’s door, all the doorsand the tailgate lock. Pulling up thelock tab on the driver’s door unlocksonly that door. The lock tab on thefront passenger’s door locks andunlocks only that door.

To lock the front passenger’s doorwhen getting out of the vehicle, pushthe lock tab down and close the door.

To lock the driver’s door, along withthe remaining doors and the tailgate,push the lock tab down or push themaster switch down, then close thedoor.

All doors and the tailgate can belocked from the outside by using thekey in either front door. To unlockonly the driver’s door from theoutside, turn the key and release it.If you turn the key and hold it, alldoors and the tailgate will unlock. Allfour doors and the tailgate willunlock when you unlock thepassenger’s door with the key.

If you forget and leave the key in theignition switch, Lockout Preventionwill not allow you to lock the driver’sdoor. With the driver’s door openand the key in the ignition, bothmaster door lock switches aredisabled. However, if the driver’sdoor is not open, the master doorlock switches are not disabled.Pushing the switch down on theopen passenger’s door will lock alldoors and the tailgate. If you try tolock an open driver’s door bypushing in the lock tab, the tabs onboth front doors pop out and the lockknobs on the rear sliding doors slideout. Pushing in the lock tab on thepassenger’s door only locks that door.

Lockout Prevention

Keys and Locks


LOCK TAB

When you push the UNLOCK buttononce, only the driver’s door unlocks.The remaining doors and the tailgateunlock when you push the button asecond time. The parking lights, sidemarker lights, taillights andinstrument panel lights flash twicewhen you push the button the firsttime.

If you unlock the doors and thetailgate with the remote transmitter,but do not open any door or thetailgate within 30 seconds, all doorsand the tailgate automatically relock.

You cannot lock the doors and thetailgate with the remote transmitterif any door or the tailgate is not fullyclosed. You cannot lock or unlockthe doors and the tailgate with thekey in the ignition switch.

You can lock and unlock your vehiclewith the remote transmitter. Whenyou push the LOCK button, all doorsand the tailgate lock. The parkinglights, side marker lights, taillightsand instrument panel lights flashonce.

When you press the UNLOCKbutton, the front and rear individualmap lights and the cargo area light,depending on their switch positions,will come on (see page ). If youdo not open any door or the tailgate,the lights stay on for about 10seconds, then go out. If you relockthe doors and the tailgate with theremote transmitter before 10seconds have elapsed, the lights willgo off immediately.

140On EX and EX-L models

Remote Transmitter

Keys and Locks


LED

UNLOCKBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

You can open or close each rearsliding door with the remotetransmitter. The right buttoncontrols the passenger’s side doorand the left button controls thedriver’s side door.

If the power sliding door MAINswitch on the dashboard is in theOFF position, you cannot open orclose the sliding doors with theremote transmitter.

Panic mode allows you to remotelyactivate your vehicle’s horn andlights to attract attention. Whenactivated, the horn will sound, andthe headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights, taillights andinstrument panel lights will flash forabout 30 seconds. To activate panicmode, press and hold the PANICbutton for about one second.

To cancel Panic mode before 30seconds, press any button on theremote transmitter. You can alsoturn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Panic mode will not activate if theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

CONTINUED

Opening or Closing the Power SlidingDoors

Panic Mode

Keys and Locks


DRIVER’SSIDESLIDINGDOORBUTTON

LED

PASSENGER’SSIDESLIDINGDOORBUTTON POWER SLIDING DOOR MAIN SWITCH

＋

▽◎

To replace the battery, remove theround cover on the back of the trans-mitter by turning it counterclockwisewith a coin.

Remove the old battery and note thepolarity. Make sure the polarity ofthe new battery is the same ( sidefacing up), then insert it in thetransmitter.

When the remote transmitter’sbattery begins to get weak, it maytake several pushes on the button tolock or unlock the doors and tailgate,and the LED will not light. Replacethe battery as soon as possible.

Battery type: CR2025

Reinstall the cushion ring. Align themark on the cover with themark on the transmitter,

then set the cover in place and turn itclockwise.

Replacing the Battery

Keys and Locks


Open

Close

ROUNDCOVER

CUSHIONRING

BATTERY

Avoid severe shock to the trans-mitter, such as dropping or throwingit. Also, protect it from extreme hotor cold temperatures.

Clean the transmitter case with asoft cloth. Do not use strongcleaners or solvents that could harmthe case. Immersing the transmitterin any liquid will harm the trans-mitter and cause it to not functionproperly.

If you lose a transmitter, you willneed to have the replacementprogrammed to your vehicle’ssystem by your Honda dealer. Anyother transmitters you have will alsoneed to be reprogrammed.




Transmitter Care

Keys and Locks


The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear sliding doors. Each door hasa lock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from the insideregardless of the position of the lockknob. To open the door, slide thelock knob forward and use theoutside door handle.

With the childproof door locks on,automatic operation with the insidedoor handle is disabled.

Use your key to lock and unlock thetailgate.

On the EX and EX-L models, you canalso lock and unlock the tailgate withthe remote transmitter (see page

).94


Keys and Locks


Childproof Door Locks Tailgate

98

Unlock

LOCKLEVER

Lock

To open the tailgate, pull the handle,then lift up the tailgate.

To close the tailgate, pull the tailgatedown, then press down on the backedge.

The tailgate also has a lock tab onthe inside.To lock the tailgate without the keyor the remote transmitter, push thelock tab down and close the tailgate.

See page for information oncargo loading. Keep the tailgateclosed at all times while driving toavoid damaging the tailgate and toprevent exhaust gas from gettinginto the interior. See

on page .66

253

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

Keys and Locks


HANDLE

LOCKTAB

Open the glove box by pulling thebottom of the handle. Close it with afirm push. Lock or unlock the glovebox with the master key.

Glove Box

Keys and Locks


GLOVE BOX

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

Your Honda is equipped with dualsliding doors. Be sure all passengersare clear of the sliding doors beforeclosing them.

Each sliding door has a lock knobunder the inside door handle. Slidethe lock knob forward to unlock, andbackward to lock.

When you drive with children in yourvehicle, use the childproof doorlocks (see page ). This willprevent children from opening thedoors accidentally.

To open a manual sliding door, pullthe inside or outside door handle andslide the door back. It will latch inthe fully-open position.To close the door, pull either handleand slide the door closed. Make surethe door is closed and latchedsecurely before driving. 98

CONTINUED

Manual Sliding Doors (LX Model)


Locking the DoorsOpening and Closing the Doors

101

OUTSIDE

INSIDE

LOCK KNOB

Lock

Unlock

Before refueling, make sure thedriver’s side sliding door is fullyclosed. When you release the fuel filldoor, the driver’s side sliding doorautomatically locks so it cannot openand interfere with the fuel door. If apassenger attempts to unlock thedoor by cycling the lock knob severaltimes, the door may unlock and canbe opened.

If a passenger needs to get out of thevehicle while you are refueling,instruct that person to exit on thepassenger’s side, not the driver’sside.

After you close the fuel fill door, thesliding door does not automaticallyunlock. You must unlock it manually.

When parking facing downhill, makesure the manual doors are latched inthe fully-open position, then hold thedoor open while allowing yourpassengers to enter or exit thevehicle. Do not pull the inside oroutside door handle, or the latch willrelease and the door will slam shut.

A Note About Refueling Parking Facing Downhill

Manual Sliding Doors (LX Model)


Your Honda is equipped with dualpower sliding doors. The doors onthe EX and EX-L models areelectrically powered and can beoperated with the remote transmitter,the door handles, or the switches onthe dashboard.

Be sure all passengers are clear ofthe sliding doors before closing them.

The power sliding doors operatewith the ignition switch in anyposition. In addition:

If you shift out of Park while a dooris opening, you will hear acontinuous tone and the door willstop moving. If you keep driving withthe door open, the tone continuesuntil you stop and close the door.

If you shift out of Park while a dooris closing, you will hear a beep untilthe power sliding door closescompletely.

Make sure both sliding doors areclosed before you start driving.

To open the door with the insidehandle, the childproof door lockon the door you want to operatemust be unlocked (see page ).

The sliding door you want tooperate must be unlocked.

The MAIN switch on thedashboard must be in the ONposition.

The shift lever must be in Park.

98

CONTINUED

Power Sliding Doors (EX, EX-L Models)


Closing a power sliding doorwhile any part of a passenger isin the door’s path can causeserious injury.

Make sure all passengers areclear of the doorway beforeclosing a sliding door.

The dashboard switches to the leftof the steering column allow you toopen or close each sliding door. Theleft switch controls the sliding dooron the left side, and the right switchcontrols the sliding door on the rightside.

The MAIN switch on the dashboardcontrols electrical power to thesliding doors. During normaloperation, leave the MAIN switch inthe ON position.

When the MAIN switch is off, theelectrical power is off and you willnot be able to use the dashboardswitches or the remote transmitterto open or close the power slidingdoors.

When the MAIN switch is off, youmust operate each sliding doormanually. To open or close a door,pull the inside or outside door handleand slide the door. The door will bedifficult to move; this is normal. Donot use force or try to move the doorrapidly, you could damage the motor.

Operating the Doors With theDashboard Switches

About the Main Switch



POWER SLIDING DOOR MAIN SWITCH

POWERSLIDINGDOORSWITCHES

To open a sliding door, make surethe door is unlocked. Then press theappropriate button

. If you forget to unlock thedoor first, you will hear three beeps.Unlock the door and try again.

To close a sliding door, press theappropriate button for at least twoseconds.

To stop the power sliding door’smovement, push the appropriatedoor button on the remotetransmitter. The door will stop, andyou will hear three beeps.

If you push the same button again,the door will reverse direction.

To open a door, make sure the dooris unlocked. Then push and releasethe bottom of the switch. If youforget to unlock the door first, youwill hear three beeps. Unlock thedoor and try again.

To close a sliding door, push andrelease the top of the appropriateswitch.

To stop the power sliding door’smovement, push either the top or thebottom of the appropriate switch.The door will stop, and you will hearthree beeps.

To start the door moving again, pushthe switch again: bottom to open, ortop to close.

You can open or close each slidingdoor with the remote transmitter.The right button controls thepassenger’s side sliding door, andthe left button controls the driver’sside sliding door.

for at least twoseconds

CONTINUED

Operating the Doors With theRemote Transmitter



DRIVER’SSIDESLIDINGDOORBUTTON

LED

PASSENGER’SSIDESLIDINGDOORBUTTON

Each power sliding door has an auto-reverse feature. If a door meetsresistance while closing, it will beepthree times and automaticallyreverse direction. However, the doormay not immediately reversedirection (like some elevator doors),and the force of a closing door maycause bruising or discomfort. Alwaysmake sure passengers and anyobjects are well away from the powersliding doors before closing them.

Also check that passengers,especially children, do not have theirhands on the edge of the sliding dooror on the door pillar. The auto-reverse feature stops working whenthe door is about to latch so themotor can pull the door shut.

With the sliding door fully-closed orfully-open, pull the outside or insidedoor handle, then release it.

Once the door begins to move, thedoor handles cannot be used to stopthe door. If you need to stop the doorfor any reason, use the dashboardswitches or the remote transmitter.

Each sliding door has a lock knobunder the inside door handle. Slidethe lock knob forward to unlock, andbackward to lock the doors. You canalso use the lock and unlock buttonson the remote transmitter.

When you drive with children in yourvehicle, use the childproof doorlocks (see page ). This willprevent children from opening thedoors accidentally.

98

Operating the Doors With the DoorHandles

Locking the Doors Sliding Doors and Obstacles



OUTSIDE

INSIDE

LOCK KNOB

Unlock

Lock

If a person or object is in the wayafter the door begins to close, thedoor handles cannot be used to stopthe door. To stop the door, use thedashboard switches or the remotetransmitter.

When parking facing downhill on asteep grade, the power sliding doorsmay not open or close as they donormally.

Make sure the MAIN switch is inthe ON position. This allows thepower assist to keep the doorsfrom slamming shut.If the MAIN switch is off, the doorcan slam shut and possibly injuresomeone.

Make sure the power sliding doorsare latched in the fully-openposition, then hold the door openwhile allowing your passengers toenter or exit the vehicle. Do notpull the inside or outside doorhandle, or the latch will releaseand the door will close.

Before refueling, make sure thedriver’s side sliding door is fullyclosed. When you release the fuel filldoor, the driver’s side sliding doorautomatically locks so it cannot openand interfere with the fuel door. If apassenger attempts to unlock thedoor by cycling the lock knob severaltimes, the door may unlock and canbe opened.

If a passenger needs to get out of thevehicle while you are refueling,instruct that person to exit on thepassenger’s side, not the driver’sside.

After you close the fuel fill door, thesliding door does not automaticallyunlock. You must unlock it manually.

CONTINUED

Parking Facing DownhillA Note About Refueling



If the Power Sliding Door indicatorcomes on and stays on, it indicates aproblem in the system. Turn theMAIN switch off to turn off theindicator. Have the system inspectedby your Honda dealer as soon aspossible.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead while asliding door is open, the powersliding door system needs to be reset.After reconnecting the battery:

If the power sliding doors are closed,the system will reset itselfautomatically once the battery hasbeen reconnected.If the power sliding doors do notoperate properly after resetting,have your vehicle checked by aHonda dealer.

Close each sliding door completelyby hand; orMove the MAIN switch on thedashboard to the ON position.Push and hold the top of each doorswitch until each sliding doorcloses completely.

Power Sliding Door IndicatorHow to Reset the Power SlidingDoors



POWER SLIDING DOOR INDICATOR

There are bucket seats witharmrests for two front passengers,bucket seats with armrests for twopassengers in the second row, and abench seat for three passengers inthe third row.

For greater cargo capacity, the seatsin the second row can be removed,and the bench seat in the third rowcan be folded into the floor.

Passenger SeatingConvertible Second Row BucketSeats

Seats


－See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

13 15

The EX and EX-L models have apower adjustable driver’s seat. Allother models have manual driver’sseat adjustments.

The front passenger’s seat, and theseats in the second and third rowsadjust manually.

Make all seat adjustments beforeyou start driving.

To adjust the seat forward andbackward, pull up on the lever underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position andrelease the lever. Try to move theseat to make sure it is locked inposition.

To adjust the bucket seats in thesecond row, pull up on the lever onthe front of the seat bottom.

Seat Adjustments

Seats


To adjust the seat-back angle of thethird seat, open the tailgate. Pull onthe handle on the back of the seat-back, move the seat-back to thedesired position, and release thehandle. Let the seat-back latch in thenew position.

To change the seat-back angle of thefront seats, pull up on the lever onthe outside of the seat bottom.

To change the seat-back angle of thebucket seats in the second row, pullforward on the lever on the outsideof the seat-back.

Seats


HANDLE

Make all adjustments before youstart driving.

The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. Turn the front dial on theoutside of the seat cushion to raisethe front of the seat bottom, and turnthe rear dial to raise the rear.

On LX model

Driver’s Seat Manual HeightAdjustment

Seats


－

Pull up or push down on the front ofthe switch to move the seat bottom’sfront edge up or down. Pull up orpush down on the rear of the switchto move the rear of the seat bottomup or down.

Push the horizontal switch forwardor backward to move the seatforward or backward.

The two power seat adjustmentswitches are on the outside edge ofthe seat bottom. The horizontalswitch adjusts the seat bottom inseveral directions. The short verticalswitch adjusts the seat-back angle.

You can adjust the seat with theignition switch in any position. Makeall seat adjustments before you startdriving.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

On EX and EX-L models13 15

CONTINUED

Driver’s Seat Power Adjustments

Seats


Pull the center of the horizontalswitch up to raise the seat. Push itdown to lower the seat.

Adjust the seat-back angle bypushing the rear switch in thedirection you want to move. Vary the lumbar support by moving

the lever on the right side of theseat-back. Move the lever forward orbackward to adjust the lumbarsupport through its full range.


Driver’s Lumbar Support

Seats


The head restraints adjust for height.You need both hands to adjust therestraint. Do not attempt to adjust itwhile driving. To raise it, pull upward.To lower the restraint, push therelease button sideways and pushthe restraint down.

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions.

The head restraints help protect youand your passengers from whiplashand other injuries. They are mosteffective when you adjust them sothe back of the occupant’s head restsagainst the center of the restraint. Ataller person should adjust therestraint as high as possible.

An armrest is located on each of thefront seats and on each side of thesecond row seats. Pivot it down touse it. When you remove the bucketseats in the second row, pivot thearmrests up out of the way.

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

16

CONTINUED

Head RestraintsArmrests

Seats


RELEASEBUTTON

When the seat on the passenger’sside is moved to the center, walkthrough the passenger’s side to getinto or out of the third row seat.

To get into or out of the third rowseat, walk between the second rowseats.

To remove a head restraint forcleaning or repair, pull it up as far asit will go. Push the release buttonand pull the restraint out of the seat-back.

Seats


Third Seat Access

116

The second row bucket seat on thepassenger’s side can be moved to thecenter to provide access to the thirdrow seat.

Remove the two floor coversbetween the bucket seats in thesecond row by carefully prying onthe back edge of the covers with aflat-tipped screwdriver.

Unlock the seat from the floor bypulling the lock release lever underthe seat cushion’s front edge andlifting the rear of the seat.

Slide the seat toward the center ofthe vehicle.

Push the back of the seat down overthe floor hooks. Make sure the seatis securely locked in place.

CONTINUED

Moving the Second Row BucketSeat

Seats


LOCKRELEASELEVER

Install the floor covers over the outerfloor hooks on the passenger’s sideas shown.

Make sure the seat is securelylocked in place before driving. A seatthat is not locked in place could flyaround and cause injury in a suddenstop or crash.

Reverse this procedure to move theseat back to the outside.

Seats


Unhook the front of the seat fromthe floor by pulling it back slightly,then pivoting it upward.

Always remove an unlocked seatfrom the vehicle before driving. Aseat that is not locked in place couldfly around and cause injury in asudden stop or crash.

Both seats can be removed to givemore cargo capacity.

To remove a seat:Pull up the seat-back angleadjustment lever, and fold the seat-back forward.Unlock the seat from the floor bypulling the lock release lever underthe seat cushion’s front edge andlifting the rear of the seat.

To reinstall the seat, hook the frontof the seat to the floor, then push theback into the locks. Make sure boththe front and the back of the seat aresecurely latched before driving.

Removing the Bucket Seats in theSecond Row

Seats


LOCK RELEASE LEVER

Remove the head restraints bypushing the release buttons andpulling the restraints out.

To create more cargo space, you canfold the third row ‘‘Magic Seat’’ intothe floor recess.To fold the seat:

Make sure the head restraint legsare inside the cargo net so they donot damage the seat as you fold it.

Store the head restraints in theside cargo net. To install the sidecargo net, hook the four loops onthe net to the tabs on the left sidepanel.

Unlock the seat-back by pullingthe handle. Push the seat-backforward.

1.

2. 3.

Folding the Third Row ‘‘MagicSeat’’

Seats


RELEASE BUTTON HANDLE

Make sure the center shoulder beltis stored in the holder and the outershoulder belts are positioned on eachhook whenever the third seat isfolded.

Make sure all items in the cargo areaare secured. Loose items can flyforward and cause injury if you haveto brake hard. Seeon page .

Pull the seat out of the recess bypulling on the handle and the strap.Pivot the seat forward all the way.

To return the seat to the uprightposition:

Pull the handle on the back of theseat cushion while you pull theentire seat towards you with thestrap. Pivot the seat into the floorrecess. Make sure the strap isabove the seat.

4.

1.

253

CONTINUED

Carrying Cargo

Seats


HANDLE

Reinstall the head restraints.

Pull up on the handle on the seat-back, and pull the seat-backupright with the strap. Make surethe seat is securely locked in place.

2.

3.

Seats


HANDLE

The HI or LO indicator lights andremains lit until you turn it off bypushing the opposite side of theswitch lightly. The indicator will turnoff.

In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seat’s temperature drops. Itcontinues to cycle as long as youleave it set on HI. The HI indicatorremains lit as a reminder that youhave the heater on.

In LO, the heater runs continuously.It does not cycle with temperaturechanges.

Do not use the seat heaters, evenon the LO setting, if the engine isleft idling for an extended period.They can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly. Select the LOsetting when the seats feel warm.The HI setting draws largeamounts of current from thebattery.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Because of the sensors for the sideairbag system, there is no heater inthe passenger’s seat-back.

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The ignition switchmust be ON (II) to use them.Theseat heater switch is located on eachfront door. Push the front of theswitch, HI, to rapidly heat up the seat.After the seat reaches a comfortabletemperature, select LO by pushingthe back of the switch. This will keepthe seat warm.

On EX-L model

Seat Heaters


Your vehicle’s front windows areelectrically-powered. Turn theignition switch to ON (II) to raise orlower either window.

The rear windows are alsoelectrically-powered (see page ).

Each front door has a switch thatcontrols its window. To open thewindow, push the switch down andhold it. Release the switch when youwant the window to stop. Close thewindow by pulling back on theswitch and holding it.

The driver’s door armrest has amaster power window control panel.To open the front passenger’swindow, push down on the switchand hold it down until the windowreaches the desired position. Toclose the window, pull back on thewindow switch. Release the switchwhen the window gets to the positionyou want.

127

Power Windows


MAIN SWITCHDRIVER’S WINDOWSWITCH

－

The master control panel also con-tains these extra features:

To open the driver’swindow fully, push the windowswitch firmly down, then release it.The window automatically goesdown all the way. To stop thewindow from going all the way down,pull back on the window switchbriefly.

To close the driver’s window fully,pull back the window switch firmly,then release it. The windowautomatically goes all the way up. Tostop the window from going all theway up, push down on the windowswitch briefly.

To open or close the driver’s windowpartially, push down or pull back onthe window switch lightly and hold it.The window will stop when yourelease the switch.

The MAIN switch controls power tothe front passenger’s window andthe rear power windows. With thisswitch off, the front passenger’swindow cannot be raised or loweredand the rear windows cannot beopened or closed. The MAIN switchdoes not affect the driver’s window.Keep the MAIN switch off when youhave children in the vehicle so theydo not injure themselves byoperating the windowsunintentionally.

CONTINUED

Power Windows


AUTO

125

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or thedriver’s window fuse is removed, theAUTO function will be disabled. Thepower window system needs to bereset after reconnecting the batteryor installing the fuse. You should dothe following.

Start the engine. Push down onthe driver’s window switch untilthe window is fully open.

Pull back on the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor a second or two more.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by a Honda dealer.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

If the driver’s window runs into anyobstacle while it is closingautomatically, it will reversedirection, and then stop. To close thewindow, remove the obstacle, thenuse the window switch again.

The power window system has a key-off delay function. The windows willstill operate for up to ten minutesafter you turn off the ignition.Opening either front door cancelsthe delay function. You must turnthe ignition switch ON (II) againbefore you can operate the windows.

1.

2.

Power Windows


Auto Reverse

126

You can open or close each rearwindow with the switches on thedriver’s door armrest. The rightswitch controls the passenger’s siderear window and the left switchcontrols the driver’s side window. Toopen the window, push the switchdown and hold it. Release the switchwhen you want the window to stop.Close the window by pulling back onthe switch and holding it.

Power Windows


REAR WINDOW SWITCHES

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns off theadjustment switch so you can’tmove a mirror out of position byaccidentally bumping the switch.

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

Adjust the outside mirrors with theadjustment switch on the left side ofthe dashboard:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Adjusting the Power Mirrors

Mirrors


TAB

SELECTOR SWITCH

ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

Canadian ModelsThe outside mirrors are heated to re-move fog and frost. With the ignitionswitch ON (II), turn on the heatersby pressing the button. The light inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

To apply the parking brake, push theparking brake pedal down with yourfoot. To release the parking brake,push on the pedal again. The parkingbrake light on the instrument panelshould go out when the parkingbrake is fully released with theengine running. (see page .)72

Parking Brake

Mirrors, Parking Brake


HEATED MIRROR BUTTON PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes and axles.

Press and hold the H button untilthe hour advances to the desiredtime.

You can use R to quickly set the timeto the nearest hour. If the displayedtime is before the half hour, pressingR sets the clock back to the previoushour. If the displayed time is afterthe half hour, pressing R sets theclock forward to the beginning of thenext hour.For example:

1:06 would RESET to 1:00.1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

To use the center table, pull up theoutside edge of the table until itlatches. To store it, pull the lever andlower the table.

Press and hold the M button untilthe numbers advance to thedesired time.

To set the clock:

The digital clock displays the timewith the ignition switch in anyposition.

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).

2.

3.

1.

On models without navigation systemDigital Clock Center Table

Digital Clock, Center Table


H M R

The center table can be extended bypulling on the rear.

Sitting on or getting under the table,or putting heavy objects on the table,may damage or deform it.

Do not put any items on the tablewhile driving. They may fall down orfly around when you go aroundcorners or brake hard.


Center Table

131

To use the front beverage holder,pull on the bottom edge. Push theholder all the way in to close it.

Additional beverage holders for thefront seat passengers, and beverageholders for the passengers in thesecond row, are in the center table.


Beverage Holders

132

Each second row seat has abeverage holder on the outside ofthe seat cushion. To use thebeverage holder, push on the tab.The beverage holder will swing open.To close, pivot it up and push it inuntil it latches.

The beverage holders for the thirdseat passengers are located in thearmrests on the rear side panels.

To protect the beverage holder, thebottom tray is designed to breakaway if you try to place a heavyobject on it. If this happens, hold theedge of the bottom tray and pull it upuntil you feel a detent.

Be careful not to damage an openbeverage holder when you get intoor out of the vehicle.

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holder. A spilled liquid thatis very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids can alsodamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

The inner liner can be removed ifyou want to hold a larger cup.


Beverage Holders

133

TAB

To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the front edge. It will unlatch andswing down. To close it, push it untilit latches. Make sure the holder isclosed while you are driving.

To use the sun visor, pull it down.You can also use the sun visor at theside window. Remove the supportrod from the clip and swing the sunvisor toward the side window. In thisposition, the sun visor can beextended by sliding out theextension.

Some larger styles of sunglassesmay not fit in the holder.


Sunglasses Holder, Sun Visor

Sunglasses Holder Sun Visor

134

EXTENSION

SUN VISOR

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle. Do not usethe sun visor extension over the rearview mirror.

To use a vanity mirror on the back ofthe sun visor, pull up the cover.

The lights beside the mirror comeon only when the parking lights areon.

A storage compartment is located bythe third seat on the driver’s side. Toopen the compartment, pull the leverand lift the lid. To close, lower the lidand push it down until it latches.


Vanity Mirror Rear Compartment

Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror, Rear Compartment

135

REAR COMPARTMENT LEVER

The coin holder is located in thefront beverage holder. To open it,pull on the bottom edge. Close itwith a firm push.

Open the center pocket by pullingthe handle. Close it with a firm push.

The light in the pocket comes onwhen the instrument panel lights areon.

Push up the handle to open thecenter pocket.On EX and EX-L models

On U.S. EX-L with optionalRear Entertainment System


Coin HolderCenter Pocket

Center Pocket, Coin Holder

136

CENTERPOCKET

COINHOLDER

To remove the box for cleaning,push on the lock tab under the seatbottom and pull the tray out. Do nottry to force the box. You coulddamage it.

To use a coat hook, push on the lid.Close it with a firm push.

Make sure the coat hook is closedwhen you are not using it. This hookis not designed for large or heavyitems.

A storage box is located under thefront passenger’s seat. To use it, pullthe handle and slide the box out.

On EX and EX-L models(Except for vehicles with navigationSystem)

Storage Box, Coat Hook


Storage Box Coat Hook

137

STORAGE BOX

LOCK TAB

LID

Your vehicle has two accessorypower sockets. The front accessorypower socket is located under thecenter pocket. The rear socket isbehind the third seat on the driver’sside.

To use an accessory power socket,pull out on the cover.

These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps). To power an accessory, theignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).

When both sockets are being used,the combined power rating of bothaccessories should be 120 watts orless (10 amps).

The sockets will not power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement.


Accessory Power Sockets

138

FRONT REAR

The light control switch controls theinterior lights: the individual maplights by the sun visors, theindividual map lights above thesecond and third row passengers,and the cargo area light. This switchhas three positions: OFF, DoorActivated, and ON.

When this switch is in the OFFposition:

None of the lights come on when adoor or the tailgate is opened.

The individual map lights in thefront can be turned on and off withthe switches next to the lights.

The individual map lights in thesecond and third rows cannot beturned on.

The cargo area light can be turnedon with the switch in the light.

The individual map lights in thefront come on when any door orthe tailgate is opened. When thedoors and the tailgate are closed,each light can be turned on and offwith the switch next to the light.

The individual map lights in thesecond and third rows come onwhen any door or the tailgate isopened. When the doors and thetailgate are closed, each light canbe turned on and off by pushingon the lens.

When the switch is in the DoorActivated position:

CONTINUED


Interior Lights

Light Control Switch

139

LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

ON

DOORACTIVATEDPOSITION

OFF

The cargo area light comes onwhen any door or the tailgate isopened if the switch in the light isin the door activated (center)position. When the doors and thetailgate are closed, it can be turnedon with the switch in the light.

When the switch is in the ONposition:

All the individual map lights comeon and stay on as long as theswitch remains in the ON position.

The cargo area light comes on andstays on if the switch in the light isin the door activated (center)position.

The lights go out about six secondsafter all the doors and the tailgateare closed.

With the light control switch in theDoor Activated position, all theindividual map lights and the cargoarea light (with the switch in thecenter position) come on when youunlock the door with the remotetransmitter (see page ).

With any door or the tailgate leftopen, the lights stay on about threeminutes, then go out.

94


Interior Lights


Turn on the front individual maplights by pushing the button next toeach light. Push the button again toturn it off. You can also operatethese lights with the light controlswitch (see page ).

Turn on each rear individual maplight by pushing the lens when theignition switch is in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Push the lens again to turn it off.You can also operate these lightswith the light control switch (seepage ).

The cargo area light has a three-position switch. In the OFF position,the light does not come on. In thecenter position, it comes on whenyou open the tailgate. In the ONposition, it stays on continuously.

This light also works with the lightcontrol switch (see page ).

139

139139


Interior Lights

Individual Map Lights Cargo Area Light

141

FRONT REAR

OFF

ON

The ignition switch light comes onwhen you open the driver’s door, andstays on several seconds after youclose the door.

Interior Lights


Ignition Switch Light

142

.....................Heating and Cooling . 144.........What Each Control Does . 144

............How to Use the System . 147..........To Turn Everything Off . 151

...............Climate Control System . 152(EX model and EX-L model without

Navigation System).......Fully-automatic Operation . 154.......Semi-automatic Operation . 156

(EX-L model with NavigationSystem)

.......Fully-automatic Operation . 160

.......Semi-automatic Operation . 161Sunlight Sensor/

............Temperature Sensor . 165...........................Rear A/C Unit . 166

.......................Audio System (LX) . 169AM/FM/Cassette Stereo

........................Audio System . 169.................Operating the Radio . 170.................Adjusting the Sound . 173

............Audio System Lighting . 174Operating the Cassette

.....................................Player . 174............Tape Search Functions . 174

Operating the Optional CD....................Player/Changer . 177

CD Changer Error.............................Indications . 180

............Audio System (EX, EX-L) . 181....AM/FM/CD Audio System . 181

.................Operating the Radio . 182

.................Adjusting the Sound . 186............Audio System Lighting . 187

....................Radio Frequencies . 187........................Radio Reception . 187

.........Operating the CD Player . 189.....Operating the CD Changer . 191

.......Protecting Compact Discs . 192....CD Player Error Indications . 193


Operating the Cassette.....................................Player . 195

............Tape Search Functions . 196Caring for the Cassette

.....................................Player . 198...........Remote Audio Controls . 199

.......................Theft Protection . 200

Audio System (Optional on..................U.S. EX-L model) . 201

AM/FM/CD/DVD Audio....................................System . 201

.................Operating the Radio . 203

.................Adjusting the Sound . 207............Audio System Lighting . 208

Operating the Cassette.....................................Player . 209

.........Operating the CD Player . 212.....Operating the CD Changer . 214....CD Player Error Indications . 215


........Rear Entertainment System . 217............................Security System . 234

...............................Cruise Control . 235HomeLink Universal

................................Transceiver . 238

Comfort and Convenience Features

Comfort and Convenience Features 143

Proper use of the Heating andCooling system can make theinterior dry and comfortable, andkeep the windows clear for the bestvisibility.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe fan’s speed, which increases airflow.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the air flow.

This button turns the air condi-tioning ON and OFF. The indicatorabove the button lights when theA/C is on.

This button controls the source ofthe air going into the system. Whenthe indicator above this button is lit,air from the vehicle’s interior is sentthrough the system again (Recircula-tion mode). When the indicator is off,air is brought in from outside thevehicle (Fresh Air mode).

With this dial, you can adjust therear A/C unit heating, cooling, andair flow (see page ).

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page ).

166

87


Heating and Cooling

What Each Control Does

Fan Control Dial

Temperature Control Dials

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Recirculation Button Rear Window Defogger Button

Rear A/C Control Dial

On LX model

144

MODE BUTTONS TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

REAR A/CCONTROL DIAL

FAN CONTROLDIAL

RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

AIR CONDITIONINGBUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

Use the MODE buttons to select thevents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the dashboard cornervents in all modes.

Air flows from the floorvents.

Air flow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Air flow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to Fresh Airmode.

When you select or ,the system automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C.In these two modes, the A/C stayson.

Heating and Cooling


Mode Buttons

145

The vents in the corners of thedashboard can be opened and closedwith the dials next to them.

You can adjust the direction of theair coming from the dashboard ventsby moving the tab in the center ofeach vent up-and-down and side-to-side.

There are four vents in the ceiling(see page ).168

Heating and Cooling


Vent Controls

146

CENTER VENTS CORNER VENT REAR CEILING VENT

CONTINUED

This section covers how to set up thesystem controls for ventilation,heating, cooling, dehumidifying, anddefrosting.

The engine must be running for theheater and air conditioning togenerate hot and cold air. The heateruses engine coolant to warm the air.If the engine is cold, it will be severalminutes before you feel warm aircoming from the system.The air conditioning does not rely onengine temperature.

It is best to leave the system in FreshAir mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in Recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.Switch to Recirculation mode whenyou are driving through smoky ordusty conditions, then switch back toFresh Air mode when the conditionclears.

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keepthese clear of leaves and otherdebris.

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear sidepanels.

Turn the temperature control dialall the way to the left.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

1.

2.3.

Heating and Cooling


How to Use the System

Ventilation

147

FAN CONTROLDIAL


RECIRCULATIONBUTTON


When the interior has cooled downto a more comfortable temperature,close the windows and set thecontrols as described for normalcooling.

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

) when driving in stop-and-gotraffic or climbing a long, steep hill.If it moves near the red zone, turnoff the A/C until the gauge readsnormally.

If the interior is very warm frombeing parked in the sun, you can coolit down more rapidly by setting upthe controls this way:

Start the engine.Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. Make sure the tempera-ture control dial is turned all theway to the left.Set the fan to maximum speed.Open the windows partially. Select

and Fresh Air mode.

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The light above the buttoncomes on when a fan speed isselected.Make sure the temperaturecontrol dial is all the way to the left.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectRecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

1.2.

3.4.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

79


Heating and Cooling

To Cool with A/C

148

FAN CONTROLDIAL


RECIRCULATIONBUTTON


To warm the interior:Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry.

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

Set the fan to the desired speed.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and Fresh Air mode.Adjust the temperature controldial so the mixture of heated andcooled air feels comfortable.

Set the fan to the desired speed.Select .When you select , thesystem automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C.Adjust the temperature controldial so the air flow from thedefroster vents feels warm.Turn on the rear window defoggerto help clear the rear window.When you switch to another modefrom , the A/C stays on.Press the A/C button to turn it off.

Start the engine.Select .When you select , thesystem automatically switches toFresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.

1.2.3.4.

1.2.

3.

4.

1.2.

3.4.

CONTINUED

Heating and Cooling


To Heat To Heat and Dehumidify with AirConditioning

To Defog and Defrost

149

To remove exterior frost or ice fromthe windshield and side windowsafter the vehicle has been sitting outin cold weather:

Start the engine.Select .When you select , thesystem automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C.Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum.

To rapidly remove exterior frost orice from the windshield (on very colddays), first select the Recirculationmode. Once the windshield is clear,select the Fresh Air mode to avoidfogging the windows.

1.2.

3.


Heating and Cooling

150

FAN CONTROLDIAL


RECIRCULATIONBUTTON


For safety, make sure you have aclear view through all the windowsbefore driving away.

These settings direct all the air flowto the defroster vents at the base ofthe windshield and the side windowdefroster vents. The air flow will getwarmer and clear the windows fasteras the engine warms up. You canclose the corner vents with the dialbeside each vent. This will sendmore warm air to the windshielddefroster vents.

To shut off the system temporarily,turn the fan speed and temperaturecontrol dials all the way to the left.

You should shut the systemcompletely off only for the first fewminutes of driving in cold weather,until the engine coolant warms upenough to operate the heater. Keepthe fan on at all other times so staleair does not build up in the interior.

Heating and Cooling


To Turn Everything Off

151

For the climate control system toprovide heating and cooling, theengine must be running.

The automatic climate controlsystem in your Honda picks theproper combination of air condi-tioning, heating, and ventilation tomaintain the interior temperatureyou select. The system also adjuststhe fan speed and air flow levels.

The direction of air flow from thevents in the center and each cornerof the dashboard is adjustable.Move the tab in the center of eachvent up-and-down and side-to-side.

Your vehicle also has a rear A/C unitthat allows the rear passengers toadjust the heating, cooling, and airflow (see page ).

The corner vents can be opened andclosed with the dials next to them.

The climate control system draws airthrough the exterior vents at thebottom of the windshield. Keepthese vents clear of leaves and otherdebris.

There are four vents in the ceiling(see page ).

166

168

Climate Control System



152

CENTER VENTS CORNER VENT



REAR CEILING VENT

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature from its current level tothe set temperature.

To put the Automatic ClimateControl in fully-automatic mode,press the AUTO button and set thefan control dial to AUTO, then setthe desired temperature by turningthe temperature control dial. You willsee FULL AUTO in the system’sdisplay. The light above the

button also shows you whichmode, Recirculation or Fresh Air, isselected.

EX model and EX-L model withoutNavigation System



Fully-automatic Operation

154

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

FULL AUTODISPLAY

FAN CONTROL DIAL

AUTO BUTTON

OFF BUTTON

When you set the temperature to itslower limit (60°F/18°C) or its upperlimit (90°F/32°C), the system runsat full cooling or heating only. It doesnot regulate the interior temperature.When the temperature is setbetween the lower and upper limits,the system regulates the interiortemperature to the set value.

Pressing the OFF button shuts theclimate control system completelyoff. Keep the system completely offonly for short periods. To keep staleair and mustiness from collecting,you should have the fan running atall times.




FULL AUTODISPLAY

FAN CONTROL DIAL

OFF BUTTON

AUTO BUTTON

You can manually select variousfunctions of the Climate Controlsystem when it is in FULL AUTO.All other features remain auto-matically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordFULL to go out.

Press the A/C button to turn the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, the sys-tem cannot regulate the inside tem-perature if you set the dial below theoutside temperature. With the A/Con, use the temperature control dialto adjust the temperature of the airflow to a comfortable setting.

This button controls the source ofthe air going into the system. Whenthe indicator above this button is lit,air from the vehicle’s interior is sentthrough the system again (Recircula-tion mode). When the indicator is off,air is brought in from outside thevehicle (Fresh Air mode).

You can, for example, manually putthe system in recirculation modewhen driving through an area ofsmoke or fumes.

Semi-automatic Operation

Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Recirculation Button


Comfort and Convenience Features156



RECIRCULATION BUTTON

You can manually select the fanspeed by turning the fan control dial.When you turn the dial clockwise,the fan is taken out of automaticmode and starts to run at its lowestspeed. Turning the dial fullyclockwise increases the fan’s speed,which increases air flow.

With this dial, you can adjust therear A/C unit heating, cooling, andair flow (see page ).

Use the MODE button to select thevents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the dashboard cornervents in all modes. Each time youpress the MODE button, the displayshows the mode selected. Press thebutton four times to see all themodes.

166

CONTINUED

Fan Control Dial

Rear A/C Control Dial

Mode Button



MODE BUTTON FAN CONTROL DIAL

REAR A/C CONTROL DIAL

The main air flow is dividedbetween the floor vents and de-froster vents at the base of the wind-shield.

The main air flow is dividedbetween the dashboard vents andthe floor vents.

The main air flow comesfrom the floor vents.

The main air flow comesfrom the dashboard vents.



The button directs the mainair flow to the windshield for fasterdefrosting. It also overrides anyMODE selection you may have made.

When you select , the A/Cturns on automatically and thesystem selects Fresh Air mode. Ifthe fan control dial is in AUTO, thefan speed increases automatically. Ifit is not in AUTO, manually increasethe fan speed or set the dial toAUTO. You can increase air flow tothe windshield by closing the sidevents in the dashboard.

When you turn off bypressing the button again, thesystem returns to its former settings.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page ).87



Rear Window Defogger Button

159

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON

▲

▼

To put the Automatic ClimateControl in fully-automatic mode,press the AUTO button. Then setthe desired temperature by pressingeither side of the TEMP button:to raise the temperature above thedisplayed value, or to lower thetemperature.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature from its current level tothe set temperature.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit (60°F/18°C) or its upperlimit (90°F/32°C), the system runsat full cooling or heating only. It doesnot regulate the interior temperature.When the temperature is setbetween the lower and upper limits,the system regulates the interior

temperature to the set value.

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until thevehicle has been driven for a shorttime and the heater starts to developwarm air.

Pressing the OFF button shuts theclimate control system completelyoff. Keep the system completely offonly for short periods. To keep staleair and mustiness from collecting,you should have the fan running atall times.

EX-L model with Navigation System


Fully-automatic Operation


TEMPERATURE BUTTON

OFF BUTTON

AUTO BUTTON

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

You can manually select variousfunctions of the Climate Controlsystem when it is in FULL AUTO.All other features remain auto-matically controlled. Some of thesefunctions appear in the NavigationSystem display. Press the A/Cbutton next to the display to showthese functions.

Pressing ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ in thedisplay turns the air conditioning onand off. You will see A/C ON or A/COFF activated in the display.

When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set it below theoutside temperature. With the A/Con, use the temperature buttons toadjust the temperature of the airflow to a comfortable setting.

CONTINUED



Semi-automatic Operation

Air Conditioning (A/C) Buttons

161

TEMPERATURE BUTTONS


AIR CONDITIONING (A/C) BUTTONS

This button controls the source ofthe air going into the system. Whenthe indicator above this button is lit,air from the vehicle’s interior is sentthrough the system again (Recircula-tion mode). When the indicator is off,air is brought in from outside thevehicle (Fresh Air mode).You can, for example, manually putthe system in recirculation modewhen driving through an area ofsmoke or fumes.

You can manually select the fanspeed by pressing any of the fancontrol icons.

Use the MODE icons to select thevents the air flows from. Some airwill flow from the dashboard cornervents and the side vents in all modes.



Recirculation Button

Fan Control Icons

Mode Icons

162


MODE ICONS

FAN CONTROL ICONS

CONTINUED

The main air flow is dividedbetween the floor vents and de-froster vents at the base of the wind-shield.

The main air flow comesfrom the floor vents.

The main air flow is dividedbetween the dashboard vents andthe floor vents.

The main air flow comesfrom the dashboard vents.



The button directs the mainair flow to the windshield for fasterdefrosting. It also overrides anyMODE selection you may have made.

When you turn off bypressing the button again, thesystem returns to its former settings.

When you select , the A/Cturns on automatically and thesystem selects Fresh Air mode. Forfaster defrosting, manually set thefan speed to high. You can alsoincrease air flow to the windshield byclosing the side vents in thedashboard.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page ).87

Rear Window Defogger Button



DEFROST BUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON

The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is locatedin the top of the dashboard and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

Sunlight Sensor/TemperatureSensor



SUNLIGHT SENSOR

TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Your vehicle has two controls for therear A/C unit. The rear A/C controldial is located on the climate controlpanel, and the rear A/C passengercontrol panel is on the ceiling behindthe driver’s seat.

You can adjust the heating, cooling,and air flow of the rear A/C unit withthese control dials. The rearpassengers can also adjust thedirection and the amount of air flowwith the rear ceiling vents.

Rear A/C Unit



166

REAR CEILING VENT REAR A/C PASSENGERCONTROL PANEL

REAR A/CCONTROL DIAL

When this dial is in the OFF position,no air flows to the rear vents, and therear control panel is turned off.

Turning the dial counterclockwisefrom the OFF position increases therear fan speed and air flow. The airflows from the rear ceiling vents.

When this dial is in the RR position,the rear A/C passenger controlpanel is enabled. A second rowpassenger can then adjust the fanspeed and air flow.

Turning the dial clockwise from theRR position turns off the rear A/Cpassenger control panel, andincreases the rear fan speed. The airflows from the rear floor vents.

When the rear A/C control dial onthe front panel is in the RR position,the passenger in the second row canuse the rear A/C passenger controlpanel to adjust the fan speed and airflow.

The fan speed control dial changesthe speed of the rear fan; turn itclockwise to increase fan speed andair flow.

CONTINUED



Rear A/C Control Dial Rear A/C Passenger Control Panel

167

REAR A/C CONTROL DIAL

FAN SPEEDCONTROL DIAL

HEATING/COOLING/AIR FLOWCONTROL DIAL

The heating/cooling/air flow controldial selects the temperature andlevel of the air flow.When the dial is in the

position, heated air flowsfrom the rear floor vents.When the dial is in the

position cooled air flowsfrom the rear ceiling vents. Cooledair can be selected when the A/Cswitch on the front control panel isturned on.

The direction and quantity of air flowfrom each rear ceiling vent isadjustable.

To adjust the direction of the aircoming from a rear ceiling vent,move the tab in the center of eachvent back-and-forth, and rotate thevent with the tab. The lever next toeach vent can be opened and closedto regulate the amount of air flow.



Rear Ceiling Vents

168

TAB

LEVER

＊

＊

Your Honda’s audio system providesclear reception on both AM and FMbands, while the preset buttons allowyou to easily select your favoritestations.

The cassette system features Dolbynoise reduction, automatic sensing ofchromium-dioxide (CrO ) tape, andautoreverse for continuous play.

2

Dolby noise reduction manufactured underlicense from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corpo-ration. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol

are trademarks of Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

On LX model

Audio System


AM/FM/Cassette Stereo AudioSystem

169

－

－

▼

▲

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pushing the PWR/VOL knob.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station is broadcast-ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction onAM is not available.

Adjust the volume by turning thePWR/VOL knob.

You can use any of four methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN or thePreset buttons.

Use the TUNE bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Press the upper part ( ) to tuneto a higher frequency, or the lowerpart ( ) to tune to a lowerfrequency. The frequency numberswill start to change rapidly. Releasethe bar when the display reaches thedesired frequency. To change thefrequency in small increments, pressand release the TUNE bar quickly.

The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, pushthe SEEK switch up or down, thenrelease it. Depending on which wayyou push the switch, the systemscans upward or downward from thecurrent frequency. It stops when itfinds a station with a strong signal.

Audio System


Operating the Radio

TUNE

SEEK

170

－

CONTINUED

The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. SCN shows in thedisplay. The system will scan up theband for a station with a strongsignal. When it finds a strong signal,it will stop and play that station forapproximately five seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and playthat for five seconds. When it plays astation that you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.

Audio System


SCAN

171

AM/FMBUTTON

SCAN BUTTON SCN INDICATOR

PWR/VOLKNOB

SEEK SWITCH TUNE BAR

－ You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset buttons.Each button will store one frequencyon the AM band, and twofrequencies on the FM band.

To store a frequency:

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton.

Use the TUNE or SEEK functionto tune the radio to a desiredstation.

Pick the Preset button you wantfor that station. Press the buttonand hold it until you hear a beep.

Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelveon FM.

Once a station’s frequency is stored,simply press and release the properPreset button to tune to it.

The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Preset

Audio System


AM/FM BUTTON

SEEK SWITCH PRESETBUTTONS

TUNE BAR

－

－

These twocontrols adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.The Balance control adjusts the side-to-side strength, while the Fadercontrol adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

To adjust the fader, push on theBASS/FADER control knob to get itto pop out. Pull it out slightly farther,and adjust the front-to-back sound toyour liking. Push the knob back inwhen you are done so you cannotchange the setting by accidentallybumping it.

To adjust the balance, push on theTREBLE/BALANCE control knobto get it to pop out. Pull it out slightlyfarther, and adjust the side-to-sidesound to your liking. Push the knobback in when you are done so youcannot change the setting byaccidentally bumping it.

Use these controlsto adjust the tone to your liking.

To adjust the Bass level, push on theBASS/FADER control knob to get itto pop out. Without pulling it outfarther, turn the knob to adjust thebass level. Push the knob back inwhen you are done so you cannotchange the setting by accidentallybumping it.

For information, see page .

To adjust the Treble level, push onthe TREBLE/BALANCE controlknob to get it to pop out. Withoutpulling it out farther, turn the knobto adjust the treble level. Push theknob back in when you are done soyou cannot change the setting byaccidentally bumping it. 187

Adjusting the SoundBalance/Fader

Treble/Bass

Radio Frequencies and Reception

Audio System


BASS/FADERCONTROL

TREBLE/BALANCECONTROL

▲ －

－When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the EJECTbutton.

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

Turn the audio system ON. Makesure the tape opening on the cassetteis facing to the right, then insert thecassette most of the way into the slot.The system will pull it in the rest ofthe way, and begin to play.

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the PROGbutton.

With a cassette playing, you can usethe FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEATfunction to find a desired program.

Fast Forward and Re-wind move the tape rapidly. To re-wind the tape, push the REW button.You will see REW in the display. Tofast forward the tape, push the FFbutton. You will see FF displayed.Press the PLAY button to take thesystem out of rewind or fast forward.

If the system reaches the end of thetape while in fast forward or rewind,it automatically stops that function,reverses direction, and begins to play.

The Skip Function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To find the beginning ofthe song or passage currentlyplaying, push the SKIP switch down.You will see REW flashing in thedisplay as the tape rewinds. To findthe beginning of the next song, pushthe SKIP switch up. You will see FFflashing in the display as the tapefast forwards. When the systemfinds the beginning of a song orpassage, it goes back to PLAY mode.

Dolby noise reduction turns on whenyou insert a cassette. If the tape wasnot recorded with Dolby noise reduc-tion, turn it off by pressing the

button.83

Audio System


Audio System Lighting

Operating the Cassette Player

Tape Search Functions

FF/REW

SKIP

174

－ The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the RPTbutton to activate it; you will see RPTdisplayed as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind. Whenit senses the beginning of the samesong or passage, the system returnsto PLAY mode. It will continue torepeat this same program until youdeactivate REPEAT by pressing thebutton again.

CONTINUED

Audio System


REPEAT

175

EJECT BUTTON CASSETTE SLOT TAPE DIRECTIONINDICATOR

FF BUTTONREW BUTTONRPT BUTTON

SKIP BUTTON

PLAY BUTTON

PROG BUTTON

DOLBY BUTTON

The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of a selection.

Damaged cassettes can jam insidethe drive or cause other problems.See page for information oncassette care and protection.

198

Caring for Cassettes

Audio System


EJECT BUTTON CASSETTE SLOT TAPE DIRECTIONINDICATOR

FF BUTTONREW BUTTONRPT BUTTON

SKIP BUTTON

DOLBY BUTTON

PROG BUTTON

PLAY BUTTON

A Compact Disc changer is availablefrom your dealer. It holds up to sixdiscs, providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate the CD changer with thesame controls used for the radio andcassette player.

Using the instructions that camewith the changer, load the desiredCDs in the magazine, and load themagazine in the changer. Play onlystandard round discs. Odd-shapedCDs may jam in the drive or causeother problems.

Your dealer also has an accessory in-dash single CD player available thatis operated by the radio controls. Tooperate this unit, use the instructions(except for those relating to multiplediscs) in this section.

CONTINUED

Operating the Optional CDPlayer/Changer

Audio System


AM/FM BUTTON

TAPE/CD BUTTON

RANDOM INDICATOR

REPEAT INDICATOR

PRESET BUTTONS

SKIP SWITCH

RPT BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

－

－

－When you activate the

Repeat feature by pressing the RPTbutton, the system continuouslyreplays the current track. You willsee RPT in the display as a reminder.Press the RPT button again to turn itoff.

This feature,when activated, plays the tracks on aCD in random order, rather than inthe order they are recorded on theCD. To activate Random Play, pressand hold the RPT button until yousee RDM in the display. The systemwill then select and play tracksrandomly on the current disc. Whenall tracks on that disc have beenplayed, the next disc is loaded andplayed randomly. This continuesuntil you deactivate Random Play bypressing RPT again.

If you push and hold the SKIP switch,you will hear a beep and the systemwill continue to move across tracks.Release the switch when you think ithas reached the desired place on thedisc.

You can use the SKIP switch toselect tracks within a disc. If youpush and release the SKIP switch,the system will move to thebeginning of a track. Push the switchup to move to the beginning of thenext track, and push the switchdown to move to the beginning ofthe current track.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate preset button (1 6). Ifyou select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will, afterfinding that slot empty, try to loadthe CD in the next slot. Thiscontinues until it finds a CD to loadand play.

For best results when using CD-Rdiscs, use only high quality discslabeled for audio use. Whenrecording a CD-R, the recordingmust be closed in order for the discto be used by CD players. CD-RWdiscs will not work in this unit.

To operate the CD changer or player,the ignition must be in ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) and the audio systemmust be on.

Press the CD button until ‘‘CD’’appears in the display. The systemwill start to play the first track of thefirst disc in the magazine. Play onlystandard round discs.

When that disc ends, the next disc inthe magazine is loaded and played.After the last disc finishes, thesystem returns to disc 1.

Audio System


REPEAT

RANDOM PLAY

178

If the system is in Repeat mode, youmust turn it off by pressing RPTbefore you can select Random Play.Then press the button again untilyou see RDM displayed.

To take the system out of CD mode,press the AM/FM button or insert acassette in the player. If a tape isalready in the cassette player, pressthe TAPE button. When you returnto CD mode, play will continue at thesame disc and track.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or the ignition switch, play willcontinue at the same disc and trackwhen you turn it back on.

192

Audio System


Protecting Compact Discs

179

AM/FM BUTTON

TAPE/CD BUTTON

RANDOM INDICATOR

REPEAT INDICATOR

PRESET BUTTONS

SKIP SWITCH

RPT BUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

If you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the vehicle toyour Honda dealer.

Indication SolutionCause

If the code disappears within a few seconds,unit is OK.Press the magazine eject button and pull outthe magazine, check for error indication. Insertthe magazine again. If the code does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,consult your Honda dealer.Press the magazine eject button. If the maga-zine does not eject, consult your Honda dealer.Press the magazine eject button, and insert anempty magazine.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

See your Honda dealer.

Insert CD magazine.

Insert a CD in the magazine.

Disc-changermalfunction.

CD magazine ejectionimpossible.Disc is in changermechanism.High Temperature

Misconnection ordisconnection of CDchanger.No CD magazine in theCD changer.No CD in magazine.

CD Changer Error Indications

Audio System



The anti-theft feature will disable thesystem if it is disconnected from thevehicle’s battery. To get the systemworking again, you must enter acode number (see page ).200


Audio System


AM/FM/CD Audio System

181

－－The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pushing the PWR/VOL knob. Adjust the volume byturning the same knob.


Use the TUNE bar to tunethe radio to a desired frequency.Press the side of the bar to tuneto a higher frequency, and the

side to tune to a lowerfrequency. The frequency numberswill start to change rapidly. Releasethe bar when the display reaches thedesired frequency. To change thefrequency in small increments, pressand release the TUNE bar quickly.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTOSELECT, and the preset buttons.

The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, pressthe SEEK bar on either the or

side, then release it.Depending on which side you press,the system scans upward or down-ward from the current frequency. Itstops when it finds a station with astrong signal.

Operating the Radio TUNE SEEK

Audio System


－

－

CONTINUED

The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. You will see SCAN inthe display. The system will scan upthe band for a station with a strongsignal. When it finds one, it will stopand play that station forapproximately five seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and playthat for five seconds. When it plays astation that you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.

You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset buttons.Each button will store one frequencyon the AM band, and twofrequencies on the FM band.

Audio System


SCAN

Preset

183

PWR/VOLKNOB

AM/FM BUTTON STEREO INDICATOR

TUNE BAR

PRESET BUTTONS

SCANBUTTON

SEEK BAR

To store a frequency:

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton.



Once a station’s frequency is stored,simply press and release the properPreset button to tune to it.The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Audio System


AM/FM BUTTON

TUNE BAR

SEEK BAR

PRESET BUTTONS

－ If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive the stations youpreset, you can use the Auto Selectfeature to find stations in the localarea.

If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’displayed when you press any presetbutton that does not have a stationstored.

Auto Select does not erase thefrequencies that you preset pre-viously. When you return home, turnoff Auto Select by pressing theA. SEL button. The preset buttonswill then select the frequencies youoriginally set.

To activate Auto Select, press theA. SEL button. A. SEL will flash inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It automatically scans both bands,looking for stations with strongsignals. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM stations and twelve FMstations in the preset buttons. Youcan then use the preset buttons toselect those stations. If you do not like the stations Auto

Select has stored, you can storeother frequencies in the presetbuttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN function to find the desiredfrequencies, then store them in theselected preset buttons as describedpreviously.

Audio System


AUTO SELECT

185

TUNE BAR SEEK BAR

AUTO SELECT INDICATOR SCAN BUTTON

A. SEL BUTTON

－

－

These twocontrols adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.The Balance control adjusts the side-to-side strength, while the Fadercontrol adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

To adjust the fader, push on theBASS/FADER control knob to get itto pop out. Pull it out slightly farther,and adjust the front-to-back sound toyour liking. Push the knob back inwhen you are done so you cannotchange the setting by accidentallybumping it.

To adjust the balance, push on theTREBLE/BALANCE control knobto get it to pop out. Pull it out slightlyfarther, and adjust the side-to-sidesound to your liking. Push the knobback in when you are done so youcannot change the setting byaccidentally bumping it.

Use these controlsto adjust the tone to your liking.

To adjust the Treble level, push onthe TREBLE/BALANCE controlknob to get it to pop out. Withoutpulling it out farther, turn the knobto adjust the treble level. Push theknob back in when you are done soyou cannot change the setting byaccidentally bumping it.

To adjust the Bass level, push on theBASS/FADER control knob to get itto pop out. Without pulling it outfarther, turn the knob to adjust thebass level. Push the knob back inwhen you are done so you cannotchange the setting by accidentallybumping it.


Audio System

Adjusting the SoundBalance/Fader

Treble/Bass

186

BASS/FADERCONTROL

TREBLE/BALANCECONTROL

CONTINUED

You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

Your Honda’s radio can receive thecomplete AM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band:530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band:87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least tenkilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

How well your Honda’s radioreceives stations is dependent onmany factors, such as the distancefrom the station’s transmitter,nearby large objects, and atmos-pheric conditions.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator will

go off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

83

Audio System


Audio System Lighting

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

187

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

Audio System


You operate the CD player with thesame controls used for the radio.

With the ignition switch inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II), insertthe disc into the CD slot. Push thedisc in halfway, the drive will pull itin the rest of the way and begin toplay. The number of the track that isplaying is shown in the display.

You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discswithout using an adapter ring. In allcases, play only standard round discs.Odd-shaped CDs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.


CONTINUED

Audio System


Operating the CD Player

189

AM/FM BUTTON CD SLOT TUNE BAR

EJECT BUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBAR

A.SEL/RDM BUTTON

RPT BUTTONCD BUTTON

－

－

You can use the TUNE and SEEK/SKIP bars while a disc is playing toselect passages and change tracks.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the TUNE bar. Press the

side to move forward. You willsee CUE in the display. Press the

side to move backward. Youwill see REW displayed. Release thebar when the system reaches thepoint you want.

Each time you press and release theside of the SEEK/SKIP bar,

the system skips forward to thebeginning of the next track. Pressthe side to skip backward to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit again to skip to the beginning ofthe previous track.

To activate the Repeatfeature, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay. The system continuouslyreplays the current track. Press theRPT button again to turn it off.

This feature,when activated, plays the tracks onthe CD in random order, rather thanin the order they are recorded on theCD. To activate Random Play, pressand release the A. SEL/RDM button.You will see RDM in the display. Thesystem will then select and playtracks randomly. This continuesuntil you deactivate Random Play bypressing A. SEL/RDM again.

If the system is in Repeat mode, youmust turn it off by pressing the RPTbutton before selecting Random Play.

When the system reaches the end ofthe disc, it will return to the begin-ning and play the disc again.

You can switch to the radio while aCD is playing by pressing the AM/FM button. Press the CD button toreturn to playing the CD. The CDwill begin playing where it left off.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

Press the eject button to remove thedisc from the drive.

If you eject the disc, but do notremove it from the slot, the systemwill automatically reload the discafter 15 seconds and put the CDplayer in pause mode. To beginplaying the disc, press the CD button.

Audio System


REPEAT

RANDOM PLAY

190

－

A Compact Disc changer is availablefor your vehicle. It holds up to sixdiscs, providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the in-dashCD player.

Load the desired CDs in themagazine and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.Play only standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems.

If you eject the disc in the in-dashCD while it is playing, the systemwill automatically switch to the CDchanger and begin play where it leftoff. If there are no CDs in thechanger, the display will flash. Youwill have to select another mode(AM or FM) with the button.

When you switch back to CD mode,the system selects the same unit (in-dash or changer) that was playingwhen you switched out of CD mode.

To use the SKIP, REPEAT, andRANDOM functions, refer to the in-dash player operating instructions.

If you load a CD in the in-dash playerwhile the changer is playing a CD,the system will stop the changer andbegin playing the in-dash CD. Toselect the changer again, press theCD button. Play will begin where itleft off. Use the CD button to switchbetween the player and the changer.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate preset button (1 6). Ifyou select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will, afterfinding that slot empty, try to loadthe CD in the next slot. Thiscontinues until it finds a CD to loadand play.

To select the CD changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed.


Audio System


Operating the CD Changer(Optional)

191

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the disc, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the magazine.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the CD.These and contamination fromfingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip penscan cause the CD to not playproperly, or possibly jam in the drive.


Audio System


If you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDplayer, find the cause in the chart tothe right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the vehicle toyour Honda dealer.

Indication Cause Solution

System ErrorFOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

Communication ErrorLSI Error

Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check if the disc is inserted correctly in CDplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.If the CD cannot be pulled out or the errorindication does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your Honda dealer.Do not try to force the disc out of the player.Consult your Honda dealer.

CD Player Error Indications

Audio System


Indication SolutionIf you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the optionalCD changer, find the cause in thechart to the right. If you cannot clearthe error indication, take the vehicleto your Honda dealer.

Cause

Press the magazine eject button and pull outthe magazine, check for error indication. Insertthe magazine again. If the code does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,consult your Honda dealer.Press the magazine eject button and pull outthe magazine, check for error indication. Insertthe magazine again. If the code does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,consult your Honda dealer.See your Honda dealer.

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Insert CD magazine.

Insert CD.

System ErrorFOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

Communication ErrorLSI ErrorHigh Temperature

No CD magazine in theCD changer.No CD in the CDmagazine.


Audio System


＊

＊

CONTINUED


Make sure the tape opening on thecassette is facing to the right, theninsert the cassette most of the wayinto the slot. The system will pull itin the rest of the way, and begin toplay.

2



Audio System


Operating the Cassette Player(Optional)

195

PWR/VOLKNOB

AM/FMBUTTON

CDBUTTON

TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR

TUNE BAR

SEEK/SKIP BAR

REPEAT BUTTON

NRBUTTON

PROGBUTTON

PLAYBUTTON

▲

－

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the PROGbutton.

Dolby noise reduction turns on whenyou insert a cassette. If the tape wasnot recorded with Dolby noisereduction, turn it off by pressing theNR button.


If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the cassette player will be inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe PLAY button.

To switch to the radio or CD playerwhile a tape is playing, press theAM/FM, or CD button. To changeback to the cassette player, push theCD button.

Fast Forward andRewind move the tape rapidly. Pressand release the side of theTUNE bar to fast forward the tape,or the side to rewind. Youwill see FF or REW flashing in thedisplay. To stop fast forward orrewind, press either side of theTUNE bar or the PLAY button. If thesystem reaches the end of the tapewhile in fast forward or rewind, itautomatically stops that function,reverses direction, and begins to play.

Noise reduction remains off until youturn it on by pressing the buttonagain.

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the EJECTbutton on the cassette player.

Audio System



FF/REW

196

－－ The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of a selection.

The Skip function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To activate SKIP, pressthe SEEK/SKIP bar. Press the

side to advance to thebeginning of the next song orpassage, or the side to return tothe beginning of the current song orpassage. FF or REW will flash in thedisplay as the tape moves. When thesystem reaches the beginning of thenext song or passage (FF), or thebeginning of the current one (REW),it goes back to PLAY mode.

The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the RPTbutton to activate it; you will see RPTdisplayed as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind. Whenit senses the beginning of the samesong or passage, the system returnsto PLAY mode. It will continue torepeat this same program until youdeactivate REPEAT by pressing thebutton again.

Audio System


SKIP REPEAT

197

The cassette player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. This contami-nation builds up over time andcauses the sound quality to degrade.To prevent this, you should clean theplayer after every 30 hours of use.Your dealer has a cleaning kitavailable.

If you do not clean the cassetteplayer regularly, it may eventuallybecome impossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit.

Use 100-minute or shorter cassettes.Cassettes longer than that usethinner tape that may break or jamthe drive.

Look at the cassette before youinsert it. If the tape is loose, tightenit by turning a hub with a pencil oryour finger.

If you see the error indication‘‘ ’’ (LX model)/‘‘ ’’(EX and EX-L models)/‘‘ ’’(optional on EX-L model) on thedisplay, press the EJECT button andremove the cassette from the unit.Make sure the tape is not damaged.If the cassette will not eject or theerror indication stays on after thecassette ejects, take the vehicle toyour Honda dealer.

If a problem develops in the connec-tion between the cassette player andthe radio, you will see ‘‘ ’’ inthe display. Take the vehicle to yourHonda dealer.

If the label is peeling off, remove itfrom the cassette or it could causethe cassette to jam in the player.Never try to insert a warped ordamaged cassette in the player.

When they are not in use, storecassettes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace cassettes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a cassette isexposed to extreme heat or cold, letit reach a moderate temperaturebefore inserting it in the player.

Never try to insert foreign objectsinto the cassette player.

On LX model

Audio System


Caring for the Cassette Player

198

▲ ▼The top and bottom buttons adjustthe volume up ( ) or down ( ).Press the proper button and hold ituntil the desired volume is reached,then release it.

Two controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The AUDIO/CH button has threefunctions, depending on whether youare listening to the radio, or playing acassette or CD.

If you are playing a cassette, use theAUDIO/CH button to advance to thenext selection. You will see ‘‘FF’’blinking in the display when youpress the AUDIO/CH button. Thesystem fast forwards until it senses asilent period, then goes back toPLAY.

If you are playing a CD, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you push theAUDIO/CH button. You will see thedisc and track number in the display.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe AUDIO/CH button to changestations. Each time you press thisbutton, the system advances to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. You will see thenumber of the selected Preset buttonin the display. To change bands,press the AM/FM button on theaudio system’s front panel.


Remote Audio Controls

Audio System


AUDIO/CHBUTTON

You will have to store your favoritestations in the Preset buttons afterthe system begins working. Youroriginal settings were lost whenpower was disconnected.

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, the usermust enter a specific five-digit codein the Preset buttons. Because thereare hundreds of numbercombinations possible from fivedigits, making the system workwithout knowing the exact code isnearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system’s codenumber and serial number. It is bestto store this card in a safe place athome. In addition, you should writethe audio system’s serial number inthis Owner’s Manual. If you shouldhappen to lose the card, you mustobtain the code number from yourHonda dealer. To do this, you willneed the system’s serial number.

If your vehicle’s battery is discon-nected or goes dead, or the radiofuse is removed, the audio systemwill disable itself. If this happens,you will see ‘‘ ’’ in thefrequency display the next time youturn on the system. Use the Presetbuttons to enter the five-digit code. Ifit is entered correctly, the radio willstart playing.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over or try tocorrect your mistake. Complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have ten tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in ten attempts, youmust then leave the system on forone hour before trying again.



Audio System

Theft Protection

200

＊

＊

CONTINUED


The anti-theft feature will disable thesystem if it is disconnected from thevehicle’s battery. To get the systemworking again, you must enter acode number (see page ).


200



2

Optional on U.S. EX-L model

Audio System


AM/FM/Cassette/CD/DVDAudio system

201

This system also has a rearentertainment system that allows therear passengers to listen throughwireless headhones to differentprogramming than the front seatoccupants. A built-in DVD playerallows the rear passengers to watchDVDs or video CDs. To operate thispart of the system, refer to RearEntertainment System on page .

The front control panel has twodisplays. The left display shows theinformation for the front part of thesystem.

When the rear system is on, theright display shows the informationfor the rear part of the system.

217

Audio System


FRONT SYSTEM DISPLAY REAR SYSTEM DISPLAY

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the audio system. Turn thesystem on by pushing the PWR/VOL knob. Adjust the volume byturning the same knob.


CONTINUED

Operating the Radio

Audio System


SCANINDICATOR

STEREOINDICATOR

TUNE KNOB

SEEK BARPRESET BUTTONSSCANBUTTON

PWR/VOLKNOB

AM/FMBUTTON

－

－

－

－－＋

Use the TUNE knob totune the radio to a desired frequency.Turn the TUNE knob to the right totune to a higher frequency, or to theleft to tune to a lower frequency.Turn the knob right or left until thedisplay reaches the desiredfrequency.

The SEEK functionsearches the band for a station witha strong signal. To activate it, pressthe SEEK bar or , thenrelease it. Depending on which partof the SEEK bar you press, thesystem scans upward or downwardfrom the current frequency. It stopswhen it finds a station with a strongsignal.

To store a frequency:Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton.



Once a station’s frequency is stored,simply press and release the properPreset button to tune to it. Thepreset frequencies will be lost if yourvehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTOSELECT, and the preset buttons.

The SCAN functionsamples all the stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. You will see SCAN inthe display. The system will scan upthe band for a station with a strongsignal. When it finds one, it will stopand play that station forapproximately five seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and playthat for five seconds. When it plays astation that you want to continuelistening to, press the SCAN buttonagain.

Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

You can store thefrequencies of your favorite radiostations in the six preset buttons.Each button will store one frequencyon the AM band, and twofrequencies on the FM band.

1.

2.

3.

4.


Audio System

TUNE

SEEK

SCAN

Preset

204

－

CONTINUED

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive the stations youpreset, you can use the Auto Selectfeature to find stations in the localarea.

To activate Auto Select, press theA. SEL button. A. SEL will flash inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It automatically scans both bands,looking for stations with strongsignals. It stores the frequencies ofsix AM stations and twelve FMstations in the preset buttons. Youcan then use the preset buttons toselect those stations.

If you are in a remote area, AutoSelect may not find six strong AMstations or twelve strong FM stations.If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’displayed when you press any presetbutton that does not have a stationstored.

Audio System


AUTO SELECT

205

A.SELINDICATOR

AM/FMBUTTON

A.SELBUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies in the presetbuttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN function to find the desiredfrequencies, then store them in theselected preset buttons as describedpreviously.

Auto Select does not erase thefrequencies that you preset pre-viously. When you return home, turnoff Auto Select by pressing theA. SEL button. The preset buttonswill then select the frequencies youoriginally set.

Audio System


A.SELINDICATOR

AM/FMBUTTON

TUNE KNOB

SCANBUTTON

A.SELBUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS SEEK BAR

－

－

CONTINUED

Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader areeach adjustable. You select which ofthese you want to adjust by pressingthe TUNE knob. The mode changesfrom BAS to TRE to FAD to BAL,and then back to the selected audiomode, each time you press theTUNE knob.

Use these modes toadjust the tone to your liking. SelectTRE or BAS by pressing the TUNEknob. Adjust the selected mode byturning the TUNE knob. Thedisplayed number shows you thecurrent setting.

These twomodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

When the adjustment level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.

Audio System


Adjusting the Sound

Treble/Bass

Balance/Fader

207

ADJUSTMENT LEVEL

TUNE KNOB

Select BAL or FAD by pressing theTUNE knob. Adjust the Balance orFader to your liking by turning theTUNE knob.The displayed number shows youthe current setting.When the adjustment level reachesthe center, you will see ‘‘ ’’.

The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about five seconds after youstop adjusting a mode with theMODE knob.

For information, see page .You can use the instrument panelbrightness control knob to adjust theillumination of the audio system (seepage ). The audio systemilluminates when the parking lightsare on, even if the radio is turned off.

187

83


Audio System

Audio System Lighting Radio Frequencies and Reception

208

▲

CONTINUED

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).Make sure the tape opening on thecassette is facing to the right, theninsert the cassette most of the wayinto the slot. The system will pull itin the rest of the way, and begin toplay.

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of thecassette is playing. The indicatesthe side you inserted facing upwardis now playing. If you want to playthe other side, press the PROG( ) button.

Dolby noise reduction turns on whenyou insert a cassette. The indi-cator will light in the display. If thetape was not recorded with Dolbynoise reduction, turn it off bypressing the button.

Audio System


Operating the Cassette Player

209

DOLBYINDICATOR

TAPE DIRECTIONINDICATOR

CASSETTESLOT

TAPE EJECTBUTTON

TAPEBUTTON

PWR/VOLKNOB

PROG BUTTON

Noise reduction remains off until youturn it on by pressing the buttonagain.

When the system reaches the end ofthe tape, it will automatically reversedirection and play the other side. Ifyou want to remove the cassettefrom the drive, press the EJECTbutton.

You can remove the cassette withthe ignition switch in any position,even if the audio system is turned off.

If you turn the system off while atape is playing, either with the PWR/VOL knob or by turning off theignition, the cassette will remain inthe drive. When you turn the systemback on, the tape will begin playingwhere it left off.

To switch to the radio, CD player, orCD changer, press the AM/FM orCD/CHG button. To change back tothe cassette player, press the TAPEbutton.

Audio System


PWR/VOLKNOB

AM/FMBUTTON

CASSETTE SLOT

TAPEEJECTBUTTON

SEEK BARFF BUTTON

PLAY/PROG BUTTON

REWBUTTON

RPTBUTTON

CD/CHG BUTTON

－

－

－

＋

－＋

－


Fast Forward andRewind move the tape rapidly. Torewind the tape, push the

button. You will see REW inthe display. To fast forward the tape,push the button. You will seeFF displayed. Press the ,

or PLAY/PROG button totake the system out of rewind or fastforward. When the system reachesthe end of the tape, it reversesdirection and begins to play.

The Skip function allowsyou to find the beginning of a songor passage. To skip to the beginningof a song or passage currentlyplaying, push the side of the SKIPbar. You will see REW flashing in thedisplay as the tape rewinds. To skipto the beginning of the next song,

push the side of the SKIP bar.You will see FF flashing in thedisplay as the tape fast forwards.When the system finds thebeginning of a song or passage, itgoes back to PLAY.

To stop the SKIP function before itfinds the beginning of a song orpassage, press either side of theSKIP bar ( or ).

The Repeat functioncontinuously replays the currentsong or passage. Press the RPTbutton to activate it; you will see RPTdisplayed as a reminder. When thesystem reaches the end of the songor passage currently playing, it willautomatically go into rewind. Whenit senses the beginning of the samesong or passage, the system returnsto PLAY mode. It will continue torepeat this same program until youdeactivate REPEAT by pressing thebutton again.

Pressing the orbutton, or either side of the

SKIP bar, also turns off REPEAT.

The SKIP and REPEAT functionsuse silent periods on the tape to findthe end of a song or passage. Thesefeatures may not work to yoursatisfaction if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel between selections, or a silentperiod in the middle of a selection.

Damaged cassettes can jam insidethe drive or cause other problems.See page for information oncassette care and protection.

198

Audio System



FF/REW

SKIP

REPEATCaring for the Cassette Player

211

You operate the CD player with thesame controls used for the radio.

With the ignition switch inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II), insertthe disc into the CD slot. Push thedisc in halfway, the drive will pull itin the rest of the way and begin toplay. The number of the track that isplaying is shown in the display.

You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discswithout using an adapter ring. Playonly standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems.


Audio System


Operating the CD Player

212

PWR/VOLKNOB

CD SLOT CD EJECTBUTTON

SKIP BARCD BUTTONRDMBUTTON

RPT BUTTON

－

－＋

－

＋

－

When the system reaches the end ofthe disc, it will return to the begin-ning and play the disc again.

You can switch to the radio while aCD is playing by pressing the AM/FM button. Press the CD button toreturn to playing the CD. The CDwill begin playing where it left off.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

Press the eject button to remove thedisc from the drive.

If you eject the disc, but do notremove it from the slot, the systemwill automatically reload the discafter 15 seconds and put the CDplayer in pause mode. To beginplaying the disc, press the CD button.

You can use the SEEK/SKIP barwhile a disc is playing to selectpassages and change tracks.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the SEEK/SKIP bar. Pressthe side to move forward. Youwill see CUE in the display. Press the

side to move backward. Youwill see REW displayed. Release thebar when the system reaches thepoint you want.

Each time you press and release theside of the SEEK/SKIP bar,

the system skips forward to thebeginning of the next track. Pressand release the side to skipbackward to the beginning of thecurrent track. Press it again to skipto the beginning of the previoustrack.

To activate the Repeatfeature, press and release the RPTbutton. You will see RPT in thedisplay. The system continuouslyreplays the current track. Press theRPT button again to turn it off.

This feature,when activated, plays the tracks onthe CD in random order, rather thanin the order they are recorded on theCD. To activate Random Play, pressand release the A. SEL/RDM button.You will see RDM in the display. Thesystem will then select and playtracks randomly. This continuesuntil you deactivate Random Play bypressing A. SEL/RDM again.

Audio System


REPEAT

RANDOM PLAY

213

－＋

A Compact Disc changer is availablefor your vehicle. It holds up to sixdiscs, providing several hours ofcontinuous entertainment. Youoperate this CD changer with thesame controls used for the in-dashCD player.

Load the desired CDs in themagazine and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.Play only standard round discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the drive orcause other problems.


To select the CD changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed.

To select a different disc, use thePreset 5 (DISC ) or Preset 6(DISC ) button. Press the Preset 6button to select the next disc in themagazine. Press the Preset 5 buttonto select the previous disc. If youselect an empty slot in the magazine,the changer will, after finding thatslot empty, try to load the CD in thenext slot. This continues until it findsa CD to load and play.

If you load a CD in the in-dash playerwhile the changer is playing a CD,the system will stop the changer andbegin playing the in-dash CD. Toselect the changer again, press theCD button. Play will begin where itleft off. Use the CD button to switchbetween the player and the changer.

If you eject the in-dash CD while it isplaying, the system will automaticallyswitch to the CD changer and beginplay where it left off. If there are noCDs in the changer, the display willflash. You will have to select anothermode (Radio or Cassette Player).

When you switch back to CD mode,the system selects the same unit (in-dash or changer) that was playingwhen you switched out of CD mode.

To use the SKIP, REPEAT, andRANDOM functions, refer to the in-dash player operating instructions.

For information on how to handleand protect compact discs, see page

.192

Audio System


Operating the CD Changer(Optional)


214

If you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the CDplayer, find the cause in the chart tothe right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the vehicle toyour Honda dealer.

Indication Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error, or aDVD has been loaded inthe CD player.

High Temperature

Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CDplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.If the CD cannot be pulled out, or the errorindication does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your Honda dealer.Do not try to force the disc out of the player.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

CD Player Error Indications

Audio System


IndicationIf you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the optionalCD changer, find the cause in thechart to the right. If you cannot clearthe error indication, take the vehicleto your Honda dealer.

Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

No CD in the CDmagazine.

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

No CD magazine in theCD changer.

Press the magazine eject button, pull out themagazine, and check for an error indication.Insert the magazine again. If the code does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,consult your Honda dealer.Insert CD.

Press the magazine eject button, pull out themagazine, and check for an error indication.Insert the magazine again. If the code does notdisappear or the magazine cannot be pulled out,consult your Honda dealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Insert CD magazine.

Audio System



216

CONTINUED

Your Honda is equipped with a RearEntertainment System that includesa DVD player for the enjoyment ofthe rear passengers. With thissystem, the rear passengers canenjoy a different entertainmentsource (radio, cassette player, CDplayer or DVD player) than the frontseat occupants.

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) tooperate the Rear EntertainmentSystem.

Turn on the rear system by pressingthe REAR PWR button. The rearentertainment system can then beoperated from the front control panel,the rear control panel on the ceiling,or with the remote control. The rightdisplay then shows the informationfor the rear system.

Optional on EX-L model


Rear Entertainment System

217

REAR PWRBUTTON

When the rear system is turned on, itselects the entertainment source itwas last set to. If that source hasbeen removed (the DVD has beenejected from the player, for example),you will see ‘‘_ _ _ _’’ in the display.You must select another source.

When you turn on the rear system,the rear speakers are automaticallyturned off. You will see the RearSpeakers Off icon in the right display.The sound for the rear system issent to the wireless headphones. Ifyou want to turn the rear speakerson again, press and hold the REARPWR button until they come on.

NOTE: The rear speakers areconnected to the front system, sothey will always play the source thatthe front system is set to. Forexample, if you are listening to theradio, and your rear passengers arelistening to a CD through theheadphones, the rear speakers will

play the radio when you turn themon. To have the vehicle speakersplay the CD, change the front sourcefrom AM/FM to CD.

Pressing the RR CTRL selector knobturns off the rear controls. Your

passengers are not able to operatethe rear system with the controlpanel in the ceiling or with theremote control. You will see the RearControls Off icon in the right display.Press the selector knob again to turnthe rear controls back on.



218

REAR PWRBUTTON

RR CTRLSELECTOR KNOB

REAR CONTROLSOFF ICON

REAR SPEAKERSOFF ICON

＊

＊

The DVD player in your RearEntertainment System can play DVDvideo discs and CDs. It featuresDolby noise reduction. The videoscreen is designed for use by therear seat passengers only.The driver and front seat passengershould not try to view the screenwhile driving.

Open the overhead screen bypushing on the button. The screenwill swing down part-way. Pivot thescreen the rest of the way. If youpivot the screen too far forward, pastthe detent, the display will turn off.Pivot the screen back to the detentto turn the display back on. To closethe screen, pivot it up until it latches.

The DVD player is located under thefront control panel. Insert the discinto the DVD slot. Push the disc inhalfway, the drive will pull it in therest of the way.Press the eject button to remove thedisc from the drive.

Follow the instructions on thefollowing pages to operate the DVDplayer from the front control panel,the rear control panel, or with theremote control.





Rear Video Operation

219

REAR CONTROLPANEL

BUTTON

OVERHEADSCREEN

DVD SLOT EJECTBUTTON

To return front panel control to thefront audio system, turn the knobcounterclockwise. The system willautomatically change back to thefront system several seconds afteryou stop pressing the buttons.

To operate the rear entertainmentsystem from the front panel, youmust first turn the RR CTRL knobclockwise to enable the panel. Theamber RR LED will come on to showthat the control panel is now enabled.



Operating the DVD Player fromthe Front Control Panel

220

RR CTRL SELECTORKNOBREAR PWR

BUTTON RR LED

RDMBUTTON

PLAYBUTTON

PAUSEBUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBAR

RPTBUTTON

＋

－

＋

－

－

Some DVDs start playingautomatically after the disc is loadedcompletely. If a disc does not startplaying, press the PLAY button. Ifthe system is in PAUSE mode, pressthe PLAY button to cancel thePAUSE mode.

Press the PAUSE button to pausethe disc. Press the button again orpress the PLAY button to return toPLAY. PAUSE works only withDVDs.

Press the RPT button tocontinuously replay the current track.You will see RPT in the display.Press the button again to turn it off.RPT works only with CDs.

To play the tracks within a CD inrandom order, press the RDMbutton. You will see RDM in thedisplay. Press the button again tocancel RDM. RDM works only withCDs.

You can move rapidly within a trackor a chapter by pressing the SEEK/SKIP bar. Press and hold the sideto move forward, You will see ‘‘CUE’’in the display. Press and hold theside to move backward, You will see‘‘REV’’ in the display. Release the barwhen the system reaches the pointyou want.

Each time you press and release theside of the SEEK/SKIP bar, the

system skips forward to thebeginning of the next track orchapter. Press and release theside of the bar to skip backward tothe beginning of the current track orchapter. If you press the side ofthe bar while the beginning of atrack or chapter is playing, thesystem skips to the beginning of theprevious track or chapter.



PLAY Button

PAUSE Button

SEEK/SKIP Bar RPT Button

RDM Button

221

▲ ▼

You can control some DVD functionsfrom the rear control panel in theceiling Make sure the rear controloperation has not been disabled withthe RR CTRL knob on the frontpanel.

Use these buttons to select theentertainment source (radio,cassette player, CD player/CDchanger, or DVD player/Auxiliarydevice). The selected source will beshown in the display.

Press this button when you want topause a DVD. Press this buttonagain to go back to Play. To select the menu on the DVD,

press the MENU button. Use the, , , and buttons to

move to the desired menu selection,then press the ENT button to enteryour selection.

Press the button to skip to thebeginning of the next chapter. Pressthe button to skip back to the

beginning of the current chapter.If you press the button while thebeginning of a chapter is playing, thesystem skips to the beginning of theprevious chapter.



Operating the DVD Player fromthe Rear Control Panel

Source Selection Buttons

PLAY/PAUSE/PROG Button

MENU/ENT Buttons

SEEK/SKIP Buttons

222

SOURCE SELECTIONBUTTONS

REAR CONTROLSOFF INDICATOR

MENUBUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBUTTON

CH/DISKBUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBUTTON

CH/DISKBUTTON

ENT BUTTONPLAY/PAUSE/PROGBUTTON

CONTINUED

You can control all of the DVDfunctions with the remote control.Make sure the rear control operationhas not been disabled with the RRCTRL knob on the front panel.

When using the remote control,point it at the rear control panel inthe ceiling.

Press this button to start playing aDVD.

Use these buttons to select theentertainment source (radio,cassette player, CD player/CDchanger, or DVD player/Auxiliarydevice). The selected source will beshown in the display.



Operating the DVD Player withthe Remote Control

Source Selection Buttons

PLAY/PROG Button

223

SOURCE SELECTIONBUTTONS

SEEK/SKIP BUTTONS

DISP BUTTON

RETURN (T/C) BUTTON

REW/FWD BUTTONS

STOP BUTTON

PAUSE BUTTON

PLAY/PROG BUTTON

MENU BUTTON

SUBTITLE BUTTON

AUDIO BUTTON

ANGLE BUTTON

TITLE BUTTON

Press this button when you want topause a DVD. Press this buttonagain to go back to Play.

Some DVDs have menus that allowyou to select a dubbed language,subtitles, a chapter list, previews, etc.The menu contents will vary fromDVD to DVD.

Press the MENU button to displaythe DVD’s main menu. Use the ,

, , and buttons to selectthe desired menu option. Then pressENT to enter your selection.

If the menu has more than one page,use the and buttonsto change pages.

You can also use the numberedbuttons to enter the number of amenu option. You do not have topress ENT, the option will beselected when you complete thenumber. Make sure you enter twodigits. If the option number is lessthan 10, enter a ‘‘0’’ first.

Some DVDs have a title menu. Thecontents of the menu vary fromDVD to DVD.

Press the TITLE button to displaythe title menu window. Move yourselection by pressing the , ,

and buttons. Enter yourselection by pressing the ENTbutton. If the menu has more thanone page, use the and

buttons to change pages.Press the TITLE button again toclose the window.

Many DVDs are recorded withsubtitles, sometimes in multiplelanguages. To select subtitles, pressthe SUBTITLE button. Continue topress and release the SUBTITLEbutton to scan through the availablelanguages.

Press this button to stop playing aDVD.

Press the button to skip to thebeginning of the next chapter. Pressthe button to skip back to thebeginning of the current chapter.

Press the button to moveforward rapidly within a chapter. Youwill see CUE in the display. Press the

button to move backwardrapidly within a chapter. You will seeREV in the display. Release thebutton when the system reaches thepoint you want.



PAUSE Button MENU Button TITLE Button

SUBTITLE Button

STOP Button

SKIP Buttons

FWD/REW Buttons

224

Many DVDs are recorded, ordubbed, in more than one language.To select a different language thanthe one being heard, press theAUDIO button. Continue to pressand release the AUDIO button tohear all the available languages.

To change the color, contrast, aspectratio, and brightness of the videoscreen, press the DISP button. Thecurrent setting of one will bedisplayed on the screen each timeyou press the button. Use the

and buttons to change thesetting as desired. The display willdisappear from the screen severalseconds after you stop adjusting thesetting.

On some DVDs, the scenes arerecorded by more than one camera,giving different viewpoints of thesame scene. By pressing the Anglebutton, you can select a differentviewpoint.

In the MENU selection mode,pressing the RETURN button forless than two seconds changes theMENU display to the previous page.Pressing the RETURN button formore than two seconds while a DVDis playing brings the system into theTITLE enter mode. When you enteryour selection, the DVD player willstart playing from the selected title.



AUDIO Button

DISP Button

ANGLE Button

RETURN (T/C) Button

225

The tips on how to handle andprotect DVDs are basically the sameas those for compact discs. Refer to‘‘Protecting Compact Discs’’ on page

.

There are various types of DVDsavailable. Some of them are notcompatible with your system.

The DVD player in your RearEntertainment System can play DVDvideo discs and CDs bearing theabove marks on their packages orjackets.

Those packages or jackets shouldalso bear the area designation of ‘‘1’’or ‘‘ALL’’.

DVD-ROMs cannot be played in thissystem.

192



Protecting DVDsPlayable DVDs

226

Indication SolutionIf you see an error indication in thedisplay while operating the DVDplayer, find the cause in the chart tothe right. If you cannot clear theerror indication, take the vehicle toyour Honda dealer.

Cause

Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check if the disc is inserted correctly in theDVD Player.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.Press the EJECT button and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.If the DVD cannot be pulled out or the errorindication does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your Honda dealer.Do not try to force the disc out of the player.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.Run the engine to recharge the battery.

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

Low Vehicle BatteryVoltage



DVD Player Error Indications

227

▲ ▼

An audio CD can be played in eitherthe main CD player in the front panel,in the DVD/CD player below thefront panel, or in the optional CDchanger. This allows the front andrear passengers to listen to differentCDs.

Select the rear system by turning theRR CTRL knob clockwise. If the CDis loaded in the main CD player, orCD changer, select CD/CHG. If theCD is loaded in the lower player,select DVD/AUX.

If the CD is loaded in the main CDplayer or CD changer, refer to pages

and for operatinginstructions. If the CD is loaded inthe DVD/AUX player, refer to page

.

If the CD is loaded in the main CDplayer or optional CD changer, selectit by pressing the CD/CHG button.If it is loaded in the lower player,press DVD/AUX.

Press the button to skip to thebeginning of the next track. Pressthe button to return to thebeginning of current track. Press itagain to go to the beginning of theprevious track.

If the CD changer is selected, usethe and buttons to changediscs.

If the CD is loaded in the main CDplayer or optional CD changer, selectit by pressing the CD/CHG button.If it is loaded in the lower player,press DVD/AUX.

Press the button to skip to thebeginning of the next track. Pressthe button to return to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit again to go to the beginning of theprevious track.

To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold either the FWD or REWbuttons. When you press FWD, youwill see ‘‘CUE’’ in the display. Whenyou press REW, you will see ‘‘REV’’in the display. Release the buttonwhen the system reaches the desiredpoint.

212 214

220



Playing a CD With the RearEntertainment System

Playing a CD With the Front Panel

Playing a CD With the Rear ControlPanel

Playing a CD With the RemoteControl

228

▲▼

Select the radio with the AM/FMbutton on the front panel, the rearcontrol panel, or the remote control.

From the front panel, after selectingthe rear system with the RR CTRLknob, use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN functions or the Presetbuttons to select a station.

From the rear control panel in theceiling, use the and

buttons to select the stationsthat are set into the Preset buttons.Pressing the or button willcause the system to search up ordown the band for a station with astrong signal. You will see SEEK inthe display.

To change Preset stations with theremote control, press the or

button. To search for strongstations, press the or

button.

After loading the cassette, select thecassette player with the TAPEbutton on the front panel, the rearcontrol panel, or the remote control.

On the rear control panel, use thePROG/PLAY button to reverse thetape’s direction. Use the and

buttons to skip. Press thebutton to skip forward to the

beginning of the next song orpassage. You will see FF flashing inthe display. Press the button toskip backward to the beginning ofthe current song or passage. You willsee REV flashing in the display.

To operate the cassette player fromthe front panel, refer to page .Make sure you have selected therear system with the RR CTRL knobfirst.

On the remote control, use thePROG/PLAY button to reverse thetape’s direction. Press the FWD orREW button to fast forward orrewind the tape. Press either ofthose buttons or the PROG/PLAYbutton to return to playing the tape.To skip to the beginning of the nextsong or passage, press the

button. You will see FFflashing in the display. To skip to thebeginning of the current song orpassage, press the button. Youwill see REW flashing in the display.

209

Playing the Radio With the RearEntertainment System

Playing a Cassette With the RearEntertainment System






To replace the batteries in theremote control, put a coin in thenotch on the back. Turn it one-quarter, then slide the cover off.Remove the old batteries. Make surethe polarity of new batteries iscorrect when you install them. Installthe cover by sliding it on until itlocks. The remote control uses twoAA batteries.



Replacing Remote ControlBatteries

230

BATTERIES

COVER

The audio for the rear entertainmentsystem is sent to the wirelessheadphones that come with thesystem. To turn on the headphones,press the red button on the earpiece.Adjust the volume level with the dialat the bottom of the same earpiece.

To adjust the comfort of theheadphones, slide the earpieces upor down the headband.

For greater battery life, turn off theheadphones when they are not in useby pressing the red button again.They will turn off automatically ifthey do not receive an audio signalfrom the system for several minutes.When not in use, store theheadphones in the pocket on theback of either front seat.

Some state and local govermentagencies prohibit the use ofheadphones by the driver of a motorvehicle. Always obey applicable lawsand regulations.

When you are not using the remotecontrol, store it in the holder. Placethe remote control in the holder withthe front end out. Put the holder intothe front seat-back pocket and hookit on the edge of the seat-backpocket as shown.

CONTINUED



Wireless HeadphonesStoring the Remote Control

231

ON/OFF BUTTONVOLUMEDIALHOLDER

The batteries are under the domedcovers on the back of each earpiece.To remove a cover, put a coin in thenotch at the bottom of the earpiece,and turn it one-quarter to pop up thecover. Slide the upper side of thecover backward (away from theheadband), then lift it up.

Remove the battery and note itspolarity. Install the new battery inthe earpiece with the polarity thesame. Set the cover in place, thenslide it up until it locks. Eachheadphone uses two AAA batteries.



Replacing Batteries

232

COVER

BATTERY

Auxiliary input jacks and headphoneconnectors for the rearentertainment system are under thethird seat armrest on the driver’sside. To access these connectors,open the cover by pulling up on thelever.

There are three headphoneconnectors for the third seatpassengers. Each connector has itsown volume control.

The system will accept auxiliaryinputs from standard video gamesand video equipment.Some video game power suppliesmay cause poor picture quality.

Auxiliary Input Jacks



ARMREST LEVER

AUXILIARY INPUT JACKS

VOLUME DIALS

HEADPHONE CONNECTORS

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flashes ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the radio. Thisalarm continues for two minutes,then the alarm stops. To reset analarming system before the twominutes have elapsed, unlock eitherfront door with the key or theremote transmitter.

The security system setsautomatically fifteen seconds afteryou lock the doors, hood, andtailgate. For the system to activate,you must lock the doors from theoutside with the key, the lock tab,the door lock switch, or the remotetransmitter. The security systemlight next to the low oil pressureindicator starts blinking immediatelyto show you the system is setting

itself.

Once the security system is set,opening any door (without using thekey or the remote transmitter), orthe hood, will cause it to alarm. Italso alarms if the radio is removedfrom the dashboard or the wiring iscut.

With the system set, you can stillopen the tailgate with the master keyor the remote transmitter withouttriggering the alarm. The alarm willsound if the tailgate lock is forced, orsmashed.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, tailgate, or any door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the Door Lamp Monitor onthe instrument panel (see page ),to see if the doors and tailgate arefully closed. Since it is not part of themonitor display, manually check thehood.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

75


Security System


SECURITY SYSTEMLIGHT

Push in the Cruise Control MasterSwitch to the left of the steeringcolumn. The indicator in theswitch will light.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Press and release the SET/decelbutton on the steering wheel. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel comes on toshow the system is now activated.

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forconditions such as city driving,winding roads, slippery roads, heavyrain, or bad weather. You shouldhave full control of the vehicle underthose conditions.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Using the Cruise Control

Cruise Control


CRUISE CONTROL MASTER SWITCH RESUME/accel

CANCEL

SET/decel

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the SET/decelbutton. The vehicle will decelerate.Release the button when youreach the desired speed.

Tap the brake pedal lightly withyour foot. The CRUISECONTROL light on the instru-ment panel will go out. When thevehicle slows to the desired speed,press the SET/decel button. Thevehicle will then maintain thedesired speed.

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RESUME/accel button. The vehicle willaccelerate. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-celerate to the desired cruisingspeed and press the SET/decelbutton.

The cruise control may not hold theset speed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down to the desired speed. Thiswill cancel the cruise control. Toresume the set speed, press theRESUME/accel button. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel comes on.

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RESUME/accel button repeatedly. Each timeyou do this, your vehicle will speedup about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the SET/decelbutton repeatedly. Each time youdo this, your vehicle will slowdown about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control


You can cancel the cruise control inany of these ways:

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Press the Cruise Control MasterSwitch.

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake pedalwill cause the cruise control tocancel.

Tap the brake pedal.

When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake pedal, the CRUISECONTROL light on the instrumentpanel will go out and the vehicle willbegin to slow down. You can use theaccelerator pedal in the normal way.The system remembers thepreviously-set cruising speed. Toreturn to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h) and thenpress and release the RESUME/accel button. The CRUISECONTROL light comes on. Thevehicle will accelerate to the samecruising speed as before.

Pressing the Cruise Control MasterSwitch turns the system completelyoff and erases the previous cruisingspeed from memory. To use thesystem again, refer to

.Using the

Cruise Control

Cancelling the Cruise Control

Cruise Control


CANCELBUTTON

Always refer to the operatinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with the HomeLinkUniversal Transceiver. If you do nothave this information, you shouldcontact the manufacturer of theequipment.

While training or using HomeLink,make sure you have a clear view ofthe garage door or gate, and that noone will be injured by its movement.

If your garage door opener wasmanufactured before April 1982, youmay not be able to programHomeLink to operate it. Garage dooropeners manufactured before thatdate do not have a safety feature thatcauses them to stop and reverse if anobstacle is detected during closing,increasing the risk of injury. If youhave questions, call (800) 355-3515.

If you are training HomeLink tooperate a garage door or gate, it isrecommended that you unplug themotor for that device during training.Repeatedly pressing the remotecontrol button could burn out themotor.

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Universal Transceiver,or would like information on homeproducts that can be operated by thetransmitter, call (800) 355-3515. Onthe Internet, go to www.homelink.com.

The HomeLink UniversalTransceiver built into your vehiclecan be programmed to operateremotely-controlled devices aroundyour home, such as garage doors,lighting, or home security systems. Itcan replace up to three remotetransmitters.

The HomeLink transmitter storesthe code in a permanent memory.There should be no need to retrainthe transmitter if your vehicle’sbattery goes dead or is disconnected.

On EX and EX-L models Important Safety Precautions

General Information

Customer Assistance

HomeLink Universal Transceiver


－

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to Step 1.

Unplug the garage door openermotor from the house current.

Before you can use HomeLink tooperate devices around your home, itmust ‘‘learn’’ the proper codes. Forexample, to train HomeLink to openand close the garage door:

If you just tookdelivery of your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button. To do this,press and hold the two outsidebuttons on the HomeLinktransceiver for about 20 seconds,until the red light flashes. Releasethe buttons, then proceed to Step 1.

Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote control 2 to 5inches from HomeLink. Makesure you are not blocking yourview of the red light in HomeLink.

Select the HomeLink button youwant to train.

Press the button on the remotecontrol and the button onHomeLink at the same time. Holddown both buttons.

2.

3.

4.1.

CONTINUED

Training HomeLink Before you begin



Canadian Owners:The remote control you are trainingfrom may stop transmitting after twoseconds. This is not long enough forHomeLink to learn the code. Releaseand press the button on the remotecontrol every two seconds untilHomeLink has learned the code.

For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener are needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure trains HomeLink to theproper garage door opener code.The following proceduresynchronizes HomeLink to thegarage door opener so they send andreceive the correct codes.

The red light in HomeLink shouldbegin flashing. It will flash slowlyat first, then rapidly.

When the red light flashes rapidly,release both buttons. HomeLinkshould have learned the code fromthe remote control.

Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the HomeLinktransceiver button by pushing it. Itshould operate the garage door.

If the button does not work, repeatthis procedure to train it again. If itstill does not work, you may have a

variable or rolling code garagedoor opener. Test this by pressingand holding the HomeLinktransceiver button you just trained.If the red light blinks for twoseconds, then stays on, you have arolling code garage door opener.You may be able to verify this withthe manufacturer’s documentation.Go to ‘‘Training With a RollingCode System.’’

Repeat these steps to train theother two HomeLink buttons tooperate any other remotely-controlled devices around yourhome (lighting, automatic gate,security system, etc.).

5.

6.8.

7.

Training With a Rolling CodeSystem



－

－

It may be helpful to have someoneassist you with this procedure.

Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer. Themanufacturer’s documentationmay help.

Press the Training button on thegarage door opener unit until thelight next to the button comes on,then release it. The light may blink,or come on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.

Press and hold the button onHomeLink for 3 4 seconds.(The same button you trained withthe ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure.)

Press the HomeLink button again.It should operate the garage door.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton again for 3 4 seconds.This should turn off the traininglight on the garage door openerunit. (Some systems may requireyou to press the button up to threetimes.)

6.

2.

4.

5.

1.

3.



TRAINING BUTTON




To train an already programmedtransmitter button to operate a newdevice:

To erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the red lightbegins to flash, then release thebuttons.

Select the HomeLink button youwant to train.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton until the red light begins toflash slowly (approximately 20seconds).

While continuing to hold theHomeLink button, place theremote control for the device 2 to5 inches from HomeLink.

Release both buttons. HomeLinkshould now be trained to operatethe device.

Press and hold the button on theremote control. Hold both buttonsuntil the red light begins to flashrapidly.

You should erase all three codesbefore selling the vehicle.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.Retraining a Button

Erasing Codes



Before you begin driving your Honda,you should know what gasoline touse, and how to check the levels ofimportant fluids. You also need toknow how to properly store luggageor packages. The information in thissection will help you. If you plan toadd any accessories to your vehicle,please read the information in thissection first.

.............................Break-in Period . 244.........................................Gasoline . 244

.........Service Station Procedures . 245................Filling the Fuel Tank . 245

....................Opening the Hood . 246...............................Oil Check . 248

.........Engine Coolant Check . 249...............................Fuel Economy . 250

.....................Vehicle Condition . 250...........................Driving Habits . 250

...Accessories and Modifications . 251.............................Carrying Cargo . 253

Before Driving

Before Driving 243

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Avoid hard braking. New brakesneed to be broken-in by moderateuse for the first 200 miles (300km).

Your Honda is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 86 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy metallic rappingnoise in the engine that can lead tomechanical damage.

You should follow these same re-commendations with an overhauledor exchanged engine, or when thebrakes are replaced.

We also recommend that you shouldnot tow a trailer during the first 500miles (800 km).

We recommend gasolines containingdetergent additives that help preventfuel system and engine deposits.

Using gasoline containing lead willdamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols. This contributes to airpollution.

Do not change the oil until therecommended time or mileageinterval shown in the maintenanceschedule.

Break-in Period, Gasoline

Before Driving

Break-in Period Gasoline

244

Because the fuel fill cap is on thedriver’s side of the vehicle, parkwith that side closest to theservice station pumps.

Open the fuel fill door by pullingon the handle to the left of thedriver’s seat.

In Canada, some gasolines containan octane-enhancing additive calledMMT. If you use such gasolines,your emission control systemperformance may deteriorate andthe Malfunction Indicator Lamp onyour instrument panel may turn on.If this happens, contact yourauthorized Honda dealer for service.

Before refueling, make sure the rearsliding door on the driver’s side isclosed.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Before Driving

Filling the Fuel Tank

Gasoline, Service Station Procedures

245

Pull

FUEL FILL CAP

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine and keepheat, sparks, and flame away.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.Place the cap in the holder on thefuel fill door.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank, leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

Shift to Park or Neutral and setthe parking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Screw the fuel fill cap back on,tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. If you do not properlytighten the cap, the MalfunctionIndicator Lamp may come on (seepage ).

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Your vehicle has an on-boardrefueling vapor recovery system tohelp keep fuel vapors from goinginto the atmosphere. If the fuelnozzle keeps clicking off eventhough the tank is not full, there maybe a problem with this system.Consult your dealer.

1.

3.

4.

5.

6.

371

Service Station Procedures

Before Driving

Opening the Hood

246

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE

CONTINUED

Pull the support rod out of its clipand insert the end into the hole onthe driver’s side of the hood.

If you can open the hood withoutlifting the hood latch handle, or thehood latch handle moves stiffly ordoes not spring back as before, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated (see page ).

Standing in front of the vehicle,put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood. The hood latchhandle is above the ‘‘H’’ logo. Pullup on this handle until it releasesthe hood. Lift the hood.

3.2.

313


Before Driving 247

LATCH

SUPPORT ROD

Wipe the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Check the engine oil level every timeyou fill the vehicle with fuel. Wait afew minutes after turning the engineoff before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orangehandle).

To close the hood, lift it up slightly toremove the support rod from thehole. Put the support rod back intoits holding clip. Lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then let it drop.

After closing the hood, make sure itis securely latched.

2.

1.


Before Driving

Oil Check

248

DIPSTICK

Refer toon page for information

on checking other items in yourHonda.

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

Insert it all the way back in its tube. Remove the dipstick again andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

4.3.

297

301

295

Before Driving


Owner MaintenanceChecks

AddingEngine Coolant

Adding Oil

Engine Coolant Check

249

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

MAX RESERVE TANK

MIN

The condition of your vehicle andyour driving habits are the two mostimportant things that affect the fuelmileage you get.

Always maintain your vehicle accord-ing to the maintenance schedule.This will keep it in top operatingcondition.

A cold engine uses more fuel than awarm engine. It is not necessary to‘‘warm-up’’ a cold engine by letting itidle for a long time. You can driveaway in about a minute, no matterhow cold it is outside. The enginewill warm up faster, and you getbetter fuel economy. To cut down onthe number of ‘‘cold starts,’’ try tocombine several short trips into one.

You can improve fuel economy bydriving moderately. Rapid acceler-ation, abrupt cornering, and hardbraking use more fuel.

Always drive in the highest gear thatallows the engine to run and acceler-ate smoothly.

Depending on traffic conditions, tryto maintain a constant speed. Everytime you slow down and speed up,your vehicle uses extra fuel. Use thecruise control, when appropriate, toincrease fuel economy.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Turn off the A/C tocut down on air conditioning use.Use the flow-through ventilationwhen the outside air temperature ismoderate.

In winter, the build-up of snow onyour vehicle’s underside adds weightand rolling resistance. Frequentcleaning helps your fuel mileage andreduces the chance of corrosion.

An important part of that mainte-nance is the

(see page ). Forexample, an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses fuel. It also wears outfaster, so check the tire pressure atleast monthly.

295

Vehicle Condition

Driving Habits

Owner MaintenanceChecks

Before Driving

Fuel Economy

250

However, if electronic accessoriesare improperly installed, or exceedyour vehicle’s electrical systemcapacity, they can interfere with the

operation of your vehicle, or evencause the airbags to deploy.

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ).

Have the installer contact yourHonda dealer for assistance beforeinstalling any electronic accessory.

If possible, have your dealer inspectthe final installation.

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake your vehicle unsafe. Beforeyou make any modifications or addany accessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

Before installing any accessory:

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer-controlled systems, suchas the SRS and anti-lock brakesystem.

Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Non-Honda accessories are usuallydesigned for universal applications.Although aftermarket accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability. (See‘‘Modifications’’ on page foradditional information.)

374

252

Accessories

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving 251

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

Covering the outside edge of afront seat-back, with a non-Hondaseat cover for example, couldprevent the airbag from inflatingproperly.

If a side airbaginflates, a cup holder or other hardobject attached on or near thedoor could be propelled inside thevehicle and hurt someone.

This could make the driver’s seatposition sensor and the frontpassenger’s weight sensorsineffective.

Some examples are:Lowering the vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to impact speedbumps or other raised objects,which could cause the airbags todeploy.

Raising the vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Aftermarket wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents.

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Do not modify your steering wheelor any other part of yourSupplemental Restraint System.Modifications could make thesystem ineffective.

Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG,’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard, couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult with your Honda dealer.

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components with non-Honda (aftermarket) componentscould seriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Modifications

Additional Safety Precautions

Accessories and Modifications

Before Driving

Do not place any objects over theoutside edge of a front seat-back.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a front door.

Do not modify the front seats.Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

252

＊

＊

＊Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas so you can stow cargosafely.

The glove box, and the pockets inthe front doors and seat-backs, aredesigned for small, lightweight items.The cargo area is intended for larger,heavier items. In addition, the seatsin the second row can be removedand the bench seat in the third rowcan be folded into the floor to allowyou to carry more cargo or longeritems.

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability, andoperation, and make it unsafe.Before carrying any type of cargo, besure to read the following pages.

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving 253

REAR COMPARTMENT FRONT DOOR POCKET

CENTER POCKET

GLOVE BOX

STORAGE BOX

SEAT-BACK POCKET

EX and EX-L models onlyCARGO AREA

SEAT-BACK POCKETS

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe driver’s ability to operate thepedals, or with the properoperation of the seats.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If the lid is open, apassenger could injure their kneesduring a crash or sudden stop.

This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, accessories,and the tongue weight if you aretowing a trailer.

The final number is the total weightof cargo you can carry.

If you are towing a trailer, add thetongue weight to the numberabove.

Add up the weight of all occupants.

To figure out how much cargo youcan carry:

When you load luggage, the totalweight of the vehicle, all passengers,cargo, and trailer tongue load mustnot exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR). The loadfor the front and rear axles also mustnot exceed the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). The GVWR andGAWR are printed on the tireinformation label attached to thedriver’s doorjamb (see page ).

The maximum load for your vehicleis 1,158 lbs (525 kg).

Subtract the total from 1,158 lbs(525 kg).

386

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Load Limit

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving254

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the cargo area, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible. Tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing thetailgate, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .

The side cargo net can be installedon the driver’s side panel in thecargo area to secure small items. Toinstall the side cargo net, hook eachloop on the four corners of the net tothe tabs on the left side panel. Whenyou fold down the third seat, storethe head restraints in the side cargonet.

If you carry any items on a rooftop carrier, be sure the totalweight of the rack and the itemson it does not exceed 150 lb(68 kg).

If you use an accessory roof topcarrier, the roof top carrier weightlimit may be lower. Refer to theinformation that came with your rooftop carrier.

66

carbon monoxidepoisoning

Side Cargo NetCarrying Cargo in the Cargo Areaor on a Roof Top Carrier

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving 255

You can use the cargo net to secureitems in the cargo area, and storesmall items between the two halvesof the net. To install the cargo net,hook the loops on the four corners ofthe net to the tabs at both sides ofthe tailgate sill.

There are cargo hooks for plasticgrocery bags on the back of the thirdrow seat. They are designed to holdlight items. Heavy objects maydamage the hooks.


Carrying Cargo

Cargo Net Cargo Hooks

Before Driving256

CARGO HOOKS

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate theautomatic transmission. It alsoincludes important information onparking your vehicle, the brakingsystem, the Traction Control System,and facts you need if you areplanning to tow a trailer.

........................Preparing to Drive . 258.......................Starting the Engine . 259

Starting in Cold Weather....................at High Altitude . 259

..............Automatic Transmission . 260.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 260

................Shift Lever Positions . 261..............Engine Speed Limiter . 263

....................Shift Lock Release . 263...........................................Parking . 265

.....................The Braking System . 266.............Brake Wear Indicators . 266

...............Brake System Design . 267.......................Anti-lock Brakes . 267

Important Safety.........................Reminders . 268........................ABS Indicator . 268

..............Traction Control System . 269...............TCS ON/OFF Switch . 270

............................TCS Indicator . 271...............Driving in Bad Weather . 272

...........................Towing a Trailer . 274

Driving

Driving 257

You should do the following checksand adjustments every day beforeyou drive your vehicle.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check the adjustment of the seat(see page ).

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Check the adjustment of thesteering wheel (see page ).

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

Turn the ignition switch ON (II).Check the indicator lights in theinstrument panel.

Start the engine (see page ).

Check the gauges and indicatorlights in the instrument panel (seepage ).

Check that any items you may becarrying with you inside are storedproperly or fastened downsecurely.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Check that the hood and tailgateare fully closed. Make sure the doors and tailgate

are securely closed and locked.3.

2.

1.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

11.

12.

10.

128

88

17

259

71

110

Preparing to Drive

Driving258

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. If the enginedoes not start right away, do nothold the key in START (III) formore than 15 seconds at a time.Pause for at least 10 secondsbefore trying again.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed half-waydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

If the engine still does not start,press the accelerator pedal all theway down and hold it there whilestarting in order to clear flooding.As before, keep the ignition key inthe START (III) position for nomore than 15 seconds. Return tostep 5 if the engine does not start.If it starts, lift your foot off theaccelerator pedal so the enginedoes not race.

An engine is harder to start in coldweather. The thinner air found athigh altitude above 8,000 feet (2,400meters) adds to the problem.Use the following procedure:

Turn off all electrical accessoriesto reduce the drain on the battery.

Push the accelerator pedal half-way to the floor and hold it therewhile starting the engine. Do nothold the ignition key in START(III) for more than 15 seconds.When the engine starts, releasethe accelerator pedal gradually asthe engine speeds up and smoothsout.

If the engine fails to start in step 2,push the accelerator pedal to thefloor and hold it there while youtry to start the engine for no morethan 15 seconds. If the enginedoes not start, return to step 2.

1.

2.

3.

5.

6.1.

2.

3.

4.

Starting the Engine

Driving

Starting in Cold Weather at HighAltitude (Above 8,000 feet/2,400 meters)

259

This indicator on the instrumentpanel shows which position the shiftlever is in.

Your Honda’s transmission has fiveforward speeds, and is electronicallycontrolled for smoother shifting. Italso has a ‘‘lock-up’’ torque converterfor better fuel economy. You mayfeel what seems like another shiftwhen the converter locks.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). If itflashes while driving (in any shiftposition), it indicates a possibleproblem in the transmission. Avoidrapid acceleration and have the trans-mission checked by an authorizedHonda dealer as soon as possible.

The malfunction indicator lamp maycome on along with the ‘‘D’’ indicatorif there is a problem in the automatictransmission control system.

Automatic Transmission

Driving

Shift Lever Position Indicator

260

－

CONTINUED

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Pull the shift levertowards you, then move it out ofPark.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see Shift Lock Release on page

.

You must also pull the shift levertowards you to shift into Park. Toavoid transmission damage, come toa complete stop before shifting intoPark. The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

The shift lever has seven positions.It must be in Park or Neutral to startthe engine. When you are stopped inD, D , 2, 1, N or R, press firmly onthe brake pedal, and keep your footoff the accelerator pedal.

263

Do this:Press the brake pedal andpull the shift lever towardsyou.

Pull the shift lever towardsyou.

Move the lever.

To shift from:

P to R

R to PN to RD to 22 to 11 to 2

2 to DD to DD to ND to DN to DR to N

3

3

3

3

3


Driving

Park (P)Shift Lever Positions

261

SHIFT LEVER

－

－

－

－Use Neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to Park posi-tion if you need to leave the vehiclefor any reason. Press on the brake pe-dal when you are moving the shiftlever from Neutral to another gear.

To shift to Reversefrom Park, see the explanation underPark. To shift to Reverse fromNeutral, come to a complete stop andthen shift. Pull the shift levertowards you before shifting intoReverse from Neutral.

Use this position foryour normal driving. The transmis-sion automatically selects a suitablegear for your speed and acceleration.You may notice the transmissionshifting up at higher speeds whenthe engine is cold. This helps theengine warm up faster.

This position is similarto D, except only the first threegears are selected. Use D whentowing a trailer in hilly terrain, or toprovide engine braking when goingdown a steep hill. D can also keepthe transmission from cyclingbetween third and fourth gears instop-and-go driving.

For faster acceleration when in D orD, you can get the transmission toautomatically downshift by pushingthe accelerator pedal to the floor.The transmission will shift down oneor two gears, depending on yourspeed.

3

3

3


Driving

Neutral (N)

Reverse (R)

Drive (D)

Drive (D )3

262

－

－

To shift to Second,pull the shift lever towards you, thenshift to the lower gear. This positionlocks the transmission in secondgear. It does not downshift to firstgear when you come to a stop.Second gives you more power whenclimbing, and increased enginebraking when going down steep hills.Use second gear when starting outon a slippery surface or in deep snow.It will help reduce wheelspin.When driving down hill with a trailer,use the Second position.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pulling the shift lever doesnot work.

Set the Parking brake.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Place a cloth on the edge of theShift Lock Release slot cover onthe steering column. Remove thecover by carefully prying on theedge with a small flat-tippedscrewdriver (not included in thetool kit).

To shift from Second toFirst, pull the shift lever towards you,then shift to the lower gear. With thelever in this position, the transmis-sion locks in First gear. By upshift-ing and downshifting through 1, 2,D , and D, you can operate thistransmission much like a manualtransmission without a clutch pedal.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

3


Driving

Second (2) Engine Speed Limiter Shift Lock Release

First (1)

263

Insert the key in the Shift LockRelease slot.

Push down on the key while youpull the shift lever towards youand move it out of Park to Neutral.

Remove the key from the ShiftLock Release slot, then install anew cover. Depress the brakepedal and restart the engine.

If you need to use the Shift LockRelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by your Hondadealer.

4.

5.

6.


Driving264

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT COVER

－

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. The indicatoron the instrument panel shows thatthe parking brake is not fullyreleased; it does not indicate that theparking brake is firmly set. Makesure the parking brake is set firmlyor your vehicle may roll if it isparked on an incline.

Set the parking brake before you putthe transmission in Park. This keepsthe vehicle from moving and puttingpressure on the parking mechanismin the transmission making iteasier to move the shift lever out ofPark when you want to drive away.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from the curb.

If the vehicle is facing downhill, turnthe front wheels toward the curb.

Make sure the parking brake is fullyreleased before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat or damagethe rear brakes.

Make sure the windows are closed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the cargo area or take themwith you.

Lock the doors and the tailgatewith the key or the remotetransmitter.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The three way catalyticconverter gets very hot, and couldcause these materials to catch onfire.

Parking Tips

Parking

Driving 265

When the brake pads need replacing,you will hear a distinctive metallic‘‘screeching’’ sound when you applythe brakes. If you do not have thebrake pads replaced, they will beginscreeching all the time.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by downshifting to a lowergear and taking your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

Check your brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Since alonger distance is needed to stopwith wet brakes, be extra cautiousand alert in your driving.

Your Honda is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The ABS helpsyou retain steering control whenbraking very hard.

Put your foot on the brake pedal onlywhen you intend to brake. Restingyour foot on the pedal keeps thebrakes applied lightly, causing themto build up heat. Heat build-up canreduce how well your brakes work. Italso keeps your brake lights on allthe time, confusing drivers behindyou.

All four brakes have audible brakewear indicators.

Your brakes may sometimes squealor squeak when you apply themlightly. Do not confuse this with thebrake wear indicators. Theindicators make a very audible‘‘screeching.’’

Brake Wear Indicators

Driving

The Braking System

266

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal; it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes.

this defeats thepurpose of the ABS. Let the ABSwork for you by always keeping firm,steady pressure on the brake pedalas you steer away from the hazard.This is sometimes referred to as

Activation varies with the amount oftraction your tires have. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before youactivate the ABS. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

Your vehicle has an Anti-lock BrakeSystem (ABS) as standardequipment. ABS helps to prevent thewheels from locking up and skiddingduring hard braking, allowing you toretain steering control.

When the front tires skid, you losesteering control; the vehiclecontinues straight ahead eventhough you turn the steering wheel.The ABS helps to prevent lock-upand helps you retain steering controlby pumping the brakes rapidly; muchfaster than a person can do it.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

The ABS also balances the front-torear braking distribution accordingto vehicle loading.

‘‘stomp and steer.’’

CONTINUED

The Braking System

Driving

You should never pump thebrake pedal;

Anti-lock BrakesBrake System Design

267

Front

＊

＊

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock. Slow down and allow a greaterdistance between vehicles underthose conditions.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safe,prudent speed for the road andweather conditions.

it only helps with steeringcontrol during braking. You shouldalways maintain a safe followingdistance from other vehicles.

The ABS is self-checking. If anythinggoes wrong, the ABS indicator onthe instrument panel comes on (seepage ). This means the anti-lockfunction of the braking system hasshut down. The brakes still work likea conventional system without anti-lock, providing normal stoppingability. You should have the dealerinspect your vehicle as soon aspossible.

74

ABS IndicatorImportant Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle,

The Braking System

Driving268

ABS INDICATOR

U.S. indicator shown

CONTINUED

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on together,and the parking brake is fullyreleased, the front-to-rear brakingdistribution system may also shutdown.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your dealer as soon aspossible. Avoid sudden hard brakingwhich could cause the rear wheels tolock up and possibly lead to a loss ofcontrol.

Driving with TCS requires no specialskills or technique. The TCS doesnot control your vehicle’s wholebraking system and cannot preventskidding if you enter a corner toofast. It is still your responsibility todrive at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

The TCS indicator will come onalong with the ABS indicator if thereis a problem with the anti-lock brakesystem.

Your Honda is equipped with aTraction Control System (TCS) toassist you in maintaining tractionwhile driving slowly on loose orslippery surfaces. The TCS assistsonly in low-speed, low-tractionconditions; up to approximately 18mph (30 km/h).

TCS monitors the speed of all fourwheels. When it senses a front wheellosing traction, it applies braking tothat wheel. The TCS indicatorflashes when this occurs.

373

The Braking System, Traction Control System

Driving

Traction Control System

269

TRACTION CONTROLSYSTEM INDICATOR

When starting out or driving at lowspeeds on a loose or slippery roadsurface, you may notice that thevehicle does not respond to theaccelerator in the same way it doesat other times. This is a sign TCS isactivating. You will see the TCSindicator light flash.

You should still install winter tires onyour vehicle during the winter. Makesure to use the same size originallysupplied with vehicle. Exercise thesame caution in winter driving as youwould if your vehicle was notequipped with TCS.

Driving with the compact spare tireinstalled (see page ) mayactivate the TCS. You should turn offthe system.

If the brakes overheat while TCS isactivating, the TCS indicator willstop flashing and stay on temporarily.This indicates that TCS has turnedoff. After the brakes have cooleddown (usually for about 10 minutes),TCS will turn back on and theindicator will turn off.

This switch is under the side vent. Itlets you turn the Traction ControlSystem on and off. You cannot turnoff the TCS while the TCS indicatorlight is flashing.

Deactivate the system by pressingthe TCS On/Off switch. The TCSindicator light comes on as areminder. Pressing the switch againturns the system back on.

352


Driving

TCS ON/OFF Switch

270

TCS ON/OFF SWITCH

If the TCS indicator comes on andstays on for more than 10 minuteswhile driving, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine, and watch theTCS indicator. If the indicatorremains on, or comes back on whiledriving, have the system inspectedby your Honda dealer. You can stilldrive the vehicle without TCS.

This indicator will come on alongwith the ABS indicator if there is aproblem in the anti-lock brakesystem (see on page

).

The TCS indicator may occasionallycome on for one or two seconds andthen go out. This is normal.

The Traction Control System turnson every time you start the engine,even if you turned it off the last timeyou drove the vehicle.

The TCS indicator comes on orflashes under the following condi-tions:

When you turn the ignition switchto ON (II).

When you manually turn off TCS.

It flashes when TCS is regulatingwheelspin.

If the system’s diagnostics sensesa problem with TCS, the indicatorwill come on and stay on.

If the brakes overheat, theindicator will come on.

268


Driving

ABS Indicator

TCS Indicator

271

－－Always driveslower than you would in dryweather. It takes your vehicle longerto react, even in conditions that mayseem just barely damp. Applysmooth, even pressure to all thecontrols. Abrupt steering wheelmovements or sudden, hard appli-cation of the brakes can cause loss ofcontrol in wet weather. Be extracautious for the first few miles(kilometers) of driving while youadjust to the change in drivingconditions. This is especially true insnow. A person can forget somesnow-driving techniques during thesummer months. Practice is neededto relearn those skills.

Exercise extra caution when drivingin rain after a long dry spell. Aftermonths of dry weather, the firstrains bring oil to the surface of theroadway, making it slippery.

Rain, fog, and snow conditions re-quire a different driving techniquebecause of reduced traction andvisibility. Keep your vehicle well-maintained and exercise greatercaution when you need to drive inbad weather. The cruise controlshould not be used in these condi-tions.

Being able to seeclearly in all directions and beingvisible to other drivers are importantin all weather conditions. This ismore difficult in bad weather. To beseen more clearly during daylighthours, turn on your headlights.

Inspect your windshield wipers andwashers frequently. Keep thewindshield washer reservoir full ofthe proper fluid. Have the windshieldwiper blades replaced if they start tostreak the windshield or leave partsunwiped. Use the defroster and airconditioning to keep the windowsfrom fogging up on the inside (seepages and ).149 159/164

Driving

Driving in Bad Weather

Driving Technique Visibility

272

－ Check your tiresfrequently for wear and properpressure. Both are important inpreventing ‘‘hydroplaning’’ (loss oftraction on a wet surface). In thewinter, mount snow tires on all fourwheels for the best handling.

Watch road conditions carefully,they can change from moment tomoment. Wet leaves can be as slip-pery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can havepatches of ice. Driving conditionscan be very hazardous when theoutside temperature is near freezing.The road surface can becomecovered with areas of water puddlesmixed with areas of ice, so yourtraction can change without warning.

Be careful when downshifting. Iftraction is low, you can lock up thedrive wheels for a moment and causea skid.

Be very cautious when passing, orbeing passed by other vehicles. Thespray from large vehicles reducesyour visibility, and the wind buffetingcan cause you to lose control.

Driving in Bad Weather

Driving

Traction

273

Your Odyssey has been designed totow a trailer, as well as for carryingpassengers and their cargo.

To safely tow a trailer, you mustobserve the load limits, use theproper equipment, and follow theguidelines in this section.

Themaximum weight you can towdepends on several factors. Seepage for limits for your towingsituation. Towing a load that is tooheavy can seriously affect yourvehicle’s handling andperformance.

275

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Load Limits

Total Trailer Weight:

274

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

＊

＊＊

＊＊＊

CONTINUED

To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60 percent of theload toward the front of the trailerand 40 percent toward the rear, thenre-adjust the load as needed.

The weight thatthe tongue of a fully-loaded trailerputs on the hitch should beapproximately 10 percent of thetrailer weight. Too little tongueload can make the trailer unstableand cause it to sway. Too muchtongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control.

Including driver. Based on 150 lbs (70 kg) per occupant.Weight limited to avoid exceeding rear GAWR (see page ).

Number of Occupants

234567

Maximum Total Trailer WeightEquipped with transmission cooler

and power steering fluid cooler3,500 lbs (1,580 kg)3,350 lbs (1,520 kg)3,200 lbs (1,450 kg)3,050 lbs (1,380 kg)2,900 lbs (1,310 kg)

650 lbs (295 kg)

:: 276

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Tongue Load:

275

The best way to confirm that vehicleand trailer weights are within limitsis to have them checked at a publicscale.

Using a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge, check the tongueload the first time you set up atowing combination (a fully-loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, all cargoand the tongue load is 5,665 lbs(2,570 kg).

The maximum allowable weightson the vehicle axles are 2,833 lbs(1,285 kg) on the front axle, and2,845 lbs (1,290 kg) on the rearaxle.

The maximum allowable weight ofthe fully loaded vehicle and traileris 8,265 lbs (3,750 kg) with theproper hitch and fluid coolers.(See page for informationabout fluid coolers.)

277

Checking LoadsGross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Gross Combined Weight Rating(GCWR):

Towing a Trailer

Driving276

Exceeding load limits orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriouslyinjured or killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

Towing can require a variety ofequipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, andhow much load you are towing.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in the rest of this section.Also make sure that all equipment isproperly installed and that it meetsfederal, state, province, and localregulations.

Any hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody,using the six threaded holesprovided. A hitch and the requiredfluid coolers designed especially foryour Odyssey can be obtained fromyour Honda dealer.

If the total trailer weight is morethan 1,850 lbs (840 kg), you mustalso use a weight distributing hitch.This device transfers weight fromthe vehicle’s rear wheels to the frontwheels, and to the trailer’s wheels.Carefully follow the hitch maker’sinstructions for proper installationand adjustment.

If the total trailer weight exceeds2,000 lbs (900 kg), you should installa sway control device to minimizeswaying that can occur in crosswindsand in normal and emergencydriving maneuvers. Your trailermaker can tell you what kind of swaycontrol you need and how to install it.

You must also have a transmissionfluid cooler and a power steeringfluid cooler installed. These coolersare available only from your Hondadealer.

Always use safety chains. Make surethey are secured to both the trailerand hitch, and that they cross underthe tongue so they can catch thetrailer if it becomes unhitched.Leave enough slack to allow thetrailer to turn corners easily, but donot let the chains drag on the ground.

CONTINUED

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Sway Control

Safety Chains

Weight Distributing Hitch

Hitches

Transmission Fluid Cooler andPower Steering Fluid Cooler

Towing a Trailer

Driving 277

Honda recommends that any trailerhaving a total weight of 1,000 lbs(450 kg) or more be equipped withits own electric or surge-type brakes.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electronically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard. To use the trailer lighting connector,

you will need a wiring harness andconverter. This comes with theHonda hitch (see page ), or itmay be obtained separately fromyour dealer.

If you use a non-Honda trailerlighting harness and converter, youcan get the connector and pins thatmate with the connector in yourvehicle from your Honda dealer.

All states and Canadian provincesrequire some type of trailer lights.Check requirements for the areaswhere you plan to tow.

Your vehicle has a trailer lightingconnector located behind the leftside panel in the cargo area. Refer tothe drawing above for the wiringcolor code and purpose of each pin.

See your trailer dealer for moreinformation on installing electricbrakes. 277

Trailer Brakes Trailer Lights

Towing a Trailer

Driving278

GROUND(BLACK)

BACK-UP LIGHT(GREEN/BLACK)

LEFT TURN SIGNAL(GREEN/BLUE)

TAILLIGHT(RED/BLACK)

BRAKE LIGHT(WHITE/BLACK)

RIGHT TURN SIGNAL(GREEN/YELLOW)

CONTINUED

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, and cooling systemare in good operating condition.

If you tow frequently, follow theSevere Conditions maintenanceschedule.

All weights and loads are withinlimits (see pages and ).

The trailer has been properlyserviced and is in good condition.

Many states and Canadian provincesrequire special outside mirrors whentowing a trailer. Even if they don’t,you should install special mirrors ifyou cannot clearly see behind you, orif the trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

Since lighting and wiring vary intrailer type and brand, you shouldalso have a qualified mechanic installa suitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer.

When towing a trailer, you shouldcarry a full-size wheel and tire as aspare in case you have a flat. If youuse the compact spare tire that camewith the vehicle, it may adverselyaffect vehicle handling. See page

for information on proper tiresize, and page for information onhow to store a full-size tire. Whenstoring a full-size spare tire in thetrailer, follow the trailer maker’sinstructions.

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

328359

274 276

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Pre-Tow ChecklistAdditional Trailer Equipment

Spare Vehicle Tire

279

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently while going up a hill, shiftto D .

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesdiscussed below.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.Use the D position when towing atrailer on level roads. See ‘‘

’’ in the next column foradditional gear information. Do notexceed 55 mph (88 km/h). At higherspeeds, the trailer may sway oraffect vehicle handling.

All items on and in the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated (see page ),and the trailer tires and spare areinflated as recommended by thetrailer maker.

You may want to fill the fuel tankwith premium fuel. Premium fuelprovides improved performance.

323

3

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Making Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

Towing Speeds and Gears

Driving onHills

Driving Safely With a Trailer

280

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including putting thetransmission in Park and firmlysetting the parking brake. Also, placewheel chocks at each of the trailer’stires.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause trailerswaying. When being passed by alarge vehicle, keep a constant speedand steer straight ahead. Do not tryto make quick steering or brakingcorrections.

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed and shift down to 2ndgear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

bottom

Towing a Trailer

Driving

ParkingHandling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Backing Up

281

282

This section explains the importanceof keeping your vehicle wellmaintained and why you shouldfollow basic maintenance safetyprecautions.

If you have the skills and tools to per-form more complex maintenancetasks on your Honda, you may wantto purchase the Service Manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your Hondadealer.

This section also includesMaintenance Schedules for normaldriving and severe driving conditions,a Maintenance Record, and instruc-tions for simple maintenance tasksyou may want to take care ofyourself.

......................Maintenance Safety . 284.Important Safety Precautions . 285

.................Maintenance Schedule . 286...Required Maintenance Record . 293

.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 295..............................Fluid Locations . 296

......................................Engine Oil . 297..................................Adding Oil . 297

....................Recommended Oil . 297..............................Synthetic Oil . 298

....................................Additives . 299.....Changing the Oil and Filter . 299

.............................Cooling System . 301............Adding Engine Coolant . 301

.......Replacing Engine Coolant . 303....................Windshield Washers . 306

....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 307....................................Brake Fluid . 309

............................Brake System . 309..............................Power Steering . 310

.....................Air Cleaner Element . 311....................................Hood Latch . 313....................................Spark Plugs . 313

..............................Replacement . 313............................Specifications . 316

...........................................Battery . 317

.................................Wiper Blades . 319..............Air Conditioning System . 321

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 322.....................................Drive Belts . 322....................................Timing Belt . 323

...............................................Tires . 323......................................Inflation . 323

..................................Inspection . 325..............................Maintenance . 326.............................Tire Rotation . 326

...Replacing Tires and Wheels . 327......................Wheels and Tires . 328

..........................Winter Driving . 328.............................Snow Tires . 329............................Tire Chains . 329

.............................................Lights . 330.....................Headlight Aiming . 332

........................Replacing Bulbs . 332....................Storing Your Vehicle . 341401

Maintenance

Maintenance 283

Regularly maintaining your vehicle isthe best way to protect yourinvestment. Proper maintenance isessential to your safety and thesafety of your passengers. It will alsoreward you with more economical,trouble-free driving, and help reduceair pollution.

This section includes instructions forsimple maintenance tasks, such aschecking and adding oil. Any serviceitems not detailed in this sectionshould be performed by a Hondatechnician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Maintenance Safety

Maintenance284

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

Before you begin any maintenance,make sure your vehicle is parked onlevel ground and that the parkingbrake is set. Also, be sure the engineis off. This will help to eliminateseveral potential hazards:

Be surethere is adequate ventilationwhenever you operate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.

Read the instructions before youbegin, and make sure you have thetools and skills required.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, be careful when workingaround gasoline or batteries. Use acommercially available degreaser orparts cleaner, not gasoline, to cleanparts. Keep cigarettes, sparks, andflames away from the battery and allfuel-related parts.

Donot run the engine unless in-structed to do so.

You should wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingnear the battery or when usingcompressed air.

Maintenance Safety

Maintenance

Important Safety Precautions

Carbon monoxide poisoningfrom engine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

285

The Maintenance Schedule specifieshow often you should have yourvehicle serviced and what thingsneed attention. It is essential thatyou have your vehicle serviced asscheduled to retain its high level ofsafety, dependability, and emissionscontrol performance.

Service your vehicle according to thetime and mileage periods on one ofthe Maintenance Schedules on thefollowing pages. Select the schedulefor ‘‘Severe Conditions’’ if most ofyour driving is done under one ormore of the conditions listed on thatpage. Otherwise, follow the schedulefor ‘‘Normal Conditions.’’The services and time or distance

intervals shown in the maintenanceschedule assume you will use yourvehicle as normal transportation forpassengers and their possessions.You should also follow theserecommendations:

Avoid exceeding your vehicle’sload limit. This puts excess stresson the engine, brakes, and manyother parts of your vehicle. Theload limit is shown on the tireinformation label on the driver’sdoorjamb.

Operate your vehicle onreasonable roads within the legalspeed limit.

Drive your vehicle regularly over adistance of several miles(kilometers).

Always use unleaded gasoline withthe proper octane rating (see page

).244

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

Which Schedule to Follow:

286

＃

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your vehicle best and canprovide competent, efficient service.However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Keep all thereceipts as proof of completion, andhave the person who does the workfill out the Maintenance Record.Check your warranty booklet formore information.

U.S. Vehicles:

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, Hondarecommends that all maintenanceservices be performed at therecommended time or mileageperiod to ensure long-term reliability.

We recommend the use of Hondaparts and fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

Maintenance, replacement orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

287

－

＃

＃

＃

Follow the Normal ConditionsMaintenance Schedule if thesevere driving conditionsspecified in the SevereConditions MaintenanceSchedule do not apply.

NOTE: If you onlydrive under a

‘‘severe’’ condition, you shouldfollow the Normal ConditionsMaintenance Schedule.

Follow the MaintenanceSchedule for Severe Conditions.

OCCASIONALLY

Maintenance

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

288

Visually inspect the following items:

Replace every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 1 year

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop

Service at the indicateddistance or time whichevercomes first.

miles x 1,000km x 1,000months

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles(96,000 km) or 5 years

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsCooling system hoses and connectionsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)

152412

304824

457236

609648

7512060

9014472

10516884

12019296

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

Replace engine oilReplace engine oil filterCheck engine oil and coolantReplace air cleaner elementInspect valve clearanceReplace spark plugsReplace timing belt, and inspect water pumpInspect and adjust drive beltsInspect idle speedReplace engine coolant

Replace transmission fluidInspect front and rear brakesReplace brake fluidCheck parking brake adjustmentReplace dust and pollen filterRotate tires (Check tire inflation and conditionat least once per month)

Adjust only if noisy

: 287

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditi

ons

－－

□□

□

□

□□□ □□

□□

□□□□□□□□□□

□□□□□□

＃

＃

＃

Maintenance 289

A, B, C

Canadian Owners

U.S. Owners

A

B

C

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time interval.

Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.

7,500 mi/12,000 km15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr22,500 mi/36,000 km30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs37,500 mi/60,000 km3 yrs45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs52,500 mi/84,000 km60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs67,500 mi/108,000 km75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs82,500 mi/132,000 km6 yrs90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs97,500 mi/156,000 km105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs

112,500 mi/180,000 km120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs9yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrsthen every 60,000 mi/96,000 km/5 yrs

Do items in A.Do items in A, B.Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage)Replace transmission fluid. Do items in A, B.

Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.

Replace transmission fluid. Do items in A, B.Do items in A.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage)Do items in A, B, C.Do items in A.

Replace timing belt, and inspect water pump.Replace transmission fluid.Inspect idle speed. Inspect valve clearance.Replace spark plugs. Do items in A, B.

Do items in A.Do items in A, B, C.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage)Replace engine coolant

Replace engine oil.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 326 ).Replace engine oil filter.Inspect front and rear brakes.Check parking brake adjustment.Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect driveshaft boots.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and checkfor leaks.Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.Inspect exhaust system .Inspect fuel lines and connections .Replace air cleaner element.Inspect and adjust drive belts.Replace dust and pollen filter.

••

290

Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, lastcolumn, page .

NOTE:

:287

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditio

ns

(listed

by

dista

nce

/time)

－

－

＊

＊

＃

＃

＃

＊

＃＊

Follow the Severe ConditionsMaintenance Schedule if youdrive your vehicleunder one or more of thefollowing conditions:

Driving less than 5 miles (8km) per trip or, in freezingtemperatures, driving lessthan 10 miles (16 km) per trip.Driving in extremely hot[over 90°F (32°C)] conditions.Extensive idling or longperiods of stop-and-go driving,such as a taxi or a commercialdelivery vehicle.Trailer towing, driving with aroof rack, or driving inmountainous conditions.Driving on muddy, dusty, orde-iced roads.

Follow the MaintenanceSchedule for Severe Conditions.

MAINLY

Maintenance

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

290

Visually inspect the following items:

Replace every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 monthsCheck oil and coolant at each fuel stop

Service at the indicateddistance or time whichevercomes first.

miles x 1,000km x 1,000months

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles(96,000 km) or 5 years

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and conditions of fluidsCooling system hoses and connectionsExhaust systemFuel lines and connectionsLights and controlsVehicle underbody

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)

Inspect every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months

304824

609648

9014472

12019296

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)

152412

457236

7512060

10516884

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .

Refer to page for replacement

information under special driving

conditions.

Refer to page for replacement

information under special driving

conditions.

Replace engine oil and oil filterCheck engine oil and coolantReplace air cleaner element

Use normal schedule except in dustyconditions

Inspect valve clearanceReplace spark plugs

Inspect and adjust drive beltsInspect idle speedReplace engine coolant

Replace transmission fluidInspect front and rear brakesReplace brake fluidCheck parking brake adjustmentReplace dust and pollen filterLubricate all hinges, locks and latchesRotate tires (Check tire inflation and conditionat least once per month)

Adjust only if noisy

1 :

2 :

: 287

322

323

Replace timing belt and inspect water pump, 1

2

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditi

ons

－－

□□□□□□□□□

□□

□□□□□□□□

□

□

＃

＃

＊

＊＃

＃

＊＊

CONTINUEDMaintenance 291

A, B, C, D

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

A

B

C

D

Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in as required for each distance/time interval.Refer to page to determine which schedule to use.

Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.

3,750 mi/6,000 km7,500 mi/12,000 km/6 mos11,250 mi/18,000 km15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr18,750 mi/30,000 km22,500 mi/36,000 km26,250 mi/42,000 km30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs33,750 mi/54,000 km37,500 mi/60,000 km41,250 mi/66,000 km3 yrs45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs48,750 mi/78,000 km52,500 mi/84,000 km60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs

63,750 mi/102,000 km

Replace engine oil and filter.Inspect front and rear brakes.Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 326 ).Inspect tie rod ends, steering gearbox and boots.Inspect suspension components.Inspect driveshaft boots.Check parking brake adjustment.Replace air cleaner element.Lubricate all hinges, locks and latches withmultipurpose grease.Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and checkfor leaks.Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.Inspect exhaust system.Inspect fuel lines and connections.Check all lights.Inspect the underbody.Replace transmission fluid.Inspect and adjust drive belts.Replace dust and pollen filter.

Do item in A.Do items in A, B.Do item in A.Do items in A, B, C.Do item in A.Do items in A, B.Do item in A.Do items in A, B, C, D.Do item in A.Do items in A, B.Do item in A.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage)Do items in A, B, C.Do item in A.Do items in A, B.

Replace timing belt.Do items in A, B, C, D.Do item in A.

290



See timing belt on page to determine need for replacement.See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information under special drivingconditions.

:

NOTE:••

1 :2 :

323322

287

2

1,

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditio

ns

(listed

by

dista

nce

/time)

□

□□□□

□□□

＊＃

＊＃

＃

＊＊

Maintenance292

See timing belt on page to determine need for replacement.See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement informationunder special driving conditions.



:

1:2:

NOTE:

287323

322

67,500 mi/108,000 km71,250 mi/114,000 km75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs78,750 mi/126,000 km82,500 mi/132,000 km86,250 mi/138,000 km6 yrs90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs93,750 mi/150,000 km97,500 mi/156,000 km101,250 mi/162,000 km105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs

108,750 mi/174,000 km112,500 mi/180,000 km116,250 mi/186,000 km120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs9yrs120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrsthen every 60,000 mi/96,000 km/5 yrs

Do items in A, B.Do item in A.Do items in A, B, C.Do item in A.Do items in A, B.Do item in A.

Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage)Do items in A, B, C, D.Do item in A.Do items in A, B.Do item in A.

Replace timing belt , and inspect water pump.Inspect valve clearance.Replace spark plugs.Inspect idle speed.

Do items in A, B, C.Do item in A.Do items in A, B.Do item in A.

Replace timing belt . Do items in A, B, C, D.Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).Replace engine coolant

••

1,

1,

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditi

ons

(lis

ted

by

dis

tance

/tim

e)

CONTINUEDMaintenance

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

293

3,750 mi

7,500 mi

11,250 mi

15,000 mi

18,750 mi

22,500 mi

26,250 mi

30,000 mi

33,750 mi

37,500 mi

41,250 mi

45,000 mi

48,750 mi

52,500 mi

56,250 mi

60,000 mi

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page ) or severeconditions (page ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Signature or dealer stamp Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

6,000 km

12,000 km

18,000 km

24,000 km(or 1 year)

30,000 km

36,000 km

42,000 km

48,000 km(or 2 years)

54,000 km

60,000 km

66,000 km


78,000 km

84,000 km

90,000 km


290288

Maintenance

Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)

294

63,750 mi

67,500 mi

71,250 mi

75,000 mi

78,750 mi

82,500 mi

86,250 mi

90,000 mi

93,750 mi

97,500 mi

101,250 mi

105,000 mi

108,750 mi

112,500 mi

116,250 mi

120,000 mi

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

102,000 km

108,000 km

114,000 km


126,000 km

132,000 km

138,000 km


150,000 km

156,000 km

162,000 km


174,000 km

180,000 km

186,000 km


－

－

－

－

－

－

－

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the page given.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Windshield washer fluid Checkthe level in the reservoir monthly.If weather conditions cause you touse the washers frequently, checkthe reservoir each time you stopfor fuel. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,turn signals, brake lights, andlicense plate light monthly. Seepage .

248

249

306

307

309

323

330

Owner Maintenance Checks

Maintenance 295

Fluid Locations

Maintenance296

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

RADIATOR CAP ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

ENGINE COOLANTRESERVOIR

To add oil, unscrew and remove theengine oil fill cap on top of the valvecover. Pour in the oil, and install theengine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely.Wait a few minutes and recheck theoil level. Do not fill above the uppermark; you could damage the engine.

Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you usegenuine Honda Motor Oil in yourvehicle for optimum engineprotection.

Pour the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

CONTINUED

Adding Oil Recommended Oil

Engine Oil

Maintenance 297

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight as shownon the chart. When using syntheticoil, you must follow the oil and filterchange intervals given in themaintenance schedule.

The oil’s viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.Select the oil for your vehicleaccording to this chart.

5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your Honda, toimprove cold weather starting, andto help your engine use less fuel.

Make sure the API Certification Sealsays ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil

Maintenance298

Ambient Temperature

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the time and distance(miles/kilometers) recommenda-tions in the maintenance schedule.The oil and filter collect contami-nants that can damage your engine ifthey are not removed regularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Open the hood and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Your Honda does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect your engine’s or transmission’sperformance and durability.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Additives Changing the Oil and Filter

Engine Oil

Maintenance 299

WASHER DRAIN BOLT

Remove the oil filter and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourHonda dealer) is required toremove the filter.

Install a new oil filter according toinstructions that come with it.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten it to:

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator light should go out withinfive seconds. If it does not, turn offthe engine and reinspect yourwork.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel. If necessary, add oil to bringthe level to the upper mark on thedipstick.

9.

8.

7.

6.

4.

5.

3.

Engine Oil

Maintenance300

OIL FILTER

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

4.6 US qt (4.4 , 3.9 Imp qt)

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.The coolant you add should alwaysbe a mixture of 50 percent antifreezeand 50 percent water. Never addstraight antifreeze or plain water.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

Always use Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Thiscoolant is pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water. Itdoes not require any additionalmixing.

If it is not available, you may useanother major-brand non-silicatecoolant as a temporary replacement.Make sure it is a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.However, continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result incorrosion, causing the coolingsystem to malfunction or fail. Havethe cooling system flushed andrefilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

CONTINUED

Adding Engine Coolant

Cooling System

Maintenance 301

RESERVE TANK

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Make sure the engine and radiatorare cool.

Turn the radiator cap counter-clockwise, without pressing downon it, until it stops. This relievesany pressure remaining in thecooling system.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Put the radiator cap back on.Tighten it fully.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Pour the coolant slowly and carefullyso you do not spill. Clean up anyspills immediately. Spilled coolantcould damage components in theengine compartment.

3.

4.

5.

6.

1.

2.

Cooling System

Maintenance302

RADIATOR CAP RESERVE TANK

CONTINUED

The cooling system should becompletely drained and refilled withnew coolant according to the timeand distance recommendations inthe maintenance schedule. Only useHonda All Season Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2.

Draining the coolant requires accessto the underside of the vehicle.Unless you have the tools andknowledge, you should have thismaintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

Turn the ignition ON (II). Turnthe heater temperature controldial fully clockwise or set theclimate control system to90°F (32°C). Turn the ignition off.Open the hood. Make sure theengine and radiator are cool to thetouch.

Remove the radiator cap.

Loosen the drain plug on thebottom of the radiator. Thecoolant will drain through thesplash guard. Drain the coolantinto an appropriate container.

1. 3.

2.

Replacing Engine Coolant

Cooling System

Maintenance 303

DRAIN PLUG

DRAIN BOLT

When the coolant stops draining,tighten the drain plug at thebottom of the radiator.

Tighten the drain bolt at the rearof the engine cylinder blocksecurely.Tightening torque:

Remove the reserve tank from itsholder by pulling it straight up.Drain the coolant into anappropriate container, then put thetank back in its holder.

Install a rubber hose on the drainbolt in the back of the engineblock. Loosen the drain bolt. Drainthe coolant into an appropriatecontainer.

6.

4. 5.

7.

Cooling System

Maintenance304

RESERVE TANK RESERVETANK CAP

HOLDER

7 lbf·ft (10 N·m , 1.0 kgf·m)

Fill the reserve tank to the MAXmark. Install the reserve tank cap.

Install the radiator cap, andtighten it to the first stop.

Start the engine and let it run untilthe radiator cooling fan comes onat least twice. Then stop theengine.

Remove the radiator cap. Fill theradiator with coolant up to thebase of the filler neck.

Install the radiator cap, andtighten it fully.

Pour Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2 intothe radiator up to the base of thefiller neck. This coolant is amixture of 50 percent antifreezeand 50 percent water. Pre-mixingis not required.

The cooling system capacity is:

8.

10.

11.

12.

13.

9.

Cooling System

Maintenance 305

FILLER NECK

Fill up to here

1.98 US gal (7.5 , 1.65 Imp gal)

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

Check the level in the windshieldwasher reservoir at least monthlyduring normal use. In bad weather,when you use the washers often,check the level every time you stopfor fuel. This reservoir supplies thewindshield and rear window washers.

The windshield washer reservoir islocated behind the passenger’s sideheadlight.Check the reservoir’s fluid level byremoving the cap and looking at thelevel gauge attached to the cap.

The low washer level indicator willlight when the level is low (see page

).77

On Canadian models

Windshield Washers

Maintenance306

LEVEL GAUGE

Do not use engine antif reeze or avinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir.

Antif reeze can damage your vehicle’spaint, while a vinegar/water solutioncan damage the windshield washerpump.

Use only commercially-availablewindshield washer f luid.

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Shut off the engine.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission as shown.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

1.

2. 3.

4.

CONTINUED

Maintenance

Automatic Transmission Fluid

307

DIPSTICK

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

To thoroughly flush the transmission,the technician should drain and refillit with Honda ATF-Z1, then drive thevehicle a short distance. Do thisthree times. Then drain and refill thetransmission a final time.

If the level is below the lowermark, remove the fill plug and addfluid to bring it to the upper mark.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill. Clean up anyspills immediately. Spilled fluidcould damage components in theengine compartment.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your Honda dealer.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Ifit is not available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect shift quality. Havethe transmission flushed andrefilled with Honda ATF-Z1 assoon as it is convenient.

5.

6.

Maintenance

Automatic Transmission Fluid

308

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement. However, the use ofany non-Honda brake fluid can causecorrosion and decrease the life of thesystem. Have the brake systemflushed and refilled with HondaHeavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 assoon as possible.

Check the fluid level in the brakefluid reservoir monthly.

The brake fluid should be replacedaccording to the time recommenda-tion in the maintenance schedule.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled fluid coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Brake System

Maintenance

Brake Fluid

309

MAX

MIN

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. If it is not available, you mayuse another power steering fluid asan emergency replacement.However, continued use can causeincreased wear and poor steering incold weather. Have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Check the level when the engine iscold. Look at the side of thereservoir. The fluid should bebetween the UPPER LEVEL andLOWER LEVEL. If it is below theLOWER LEVEL, add power steeringfluid to the UPPER LEVEL.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled fluid coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Power Steering

Maintenance310

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVEL

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

To replace it:

Remove the two pins holding theair intake cover by pulling thehead on each pin. Remove the airintake cover.

The air cleaner element is inside theair cleaner housing on the driver’sside of the engine compartment.

Loosen the four bolts by using aPhillips-head screwdriver.

The air cleaner element should bereplaced according to the time anddistance recommendations in themaintenance schedule.

1.

2.

CONTINUED

Replacement

Air Cleaner Element

Maintenance 311

AIRINTAKECOVER

BOLTS

Remove the air cleaner housingcover.

Remove the old air cleanerelement.

Carefully clean the inside of theair cleaner housing with a damprag.

The coolant lines inside the aircleaner housing may be warm.

Place the new air cleaner elementin the air cleaner housing.

Reinstall the air cleaner housingcover, and tighten the four bolts.

Reinstall the air intake cover.Reinstall the two pins and securethem by pushing on the headsuntil they lock.

3.

4.

6.

7.

5. 8.

Maintenance

Air Cleaner Element

312

AIR CLEANER ELEMENT

The spark plugs in your vehicle are aspecial platinum-tipped design forlonger life. The spark plugs shouldbe replaced according to the timeand distance recommendations inthe maintenance schedule.

Clean the hood latch assembly with amild cleaner, then lubricate it with amultipurpose grease. Lubricate allthe moving parts (as shown),including the pivot. Follow the timeand distance recommendations inthe Maintenance Schedule. If youare not sure how to clean and greasethe latch, contact your Honda dealer.

Loosen the four bolts with awrench, then remove the enginecover.

1.

CONTINUED

Hood Latch Spark Plugs

Hood Latch, Spark Plugs

Maintenance

Replacement

313

LATCH ASSEMBLY BOLTS

ENGINECOVER

BOLTS

Loosen the two holding clips byturning the heads one-quarter turncounterclockwise with a flat-tippedscrewdriver. Remove the cover onthe front cylinder bank by pullingit straight up.

Clean off any dirt and oil that havecollected around the ignition coils.

Disconnect the wire connectorfrom the ignition coil by pushingon the lock tab and pulling on theconnector. Pull on the plasticconnector, not the wires.

Use a wrench to remove thehexagon socket head cap boltholding the ignition coil. Removethe ignition coil by pulling itstraight out.

Remove the spark plug witha five-eighths inch (16 mm) sparkplug socket.

5.

6.

4.2.

3.

Maintenance

Spark Plugs

314

HEXAGON SOCKET HEAD CAP BOLTHOLDING CLIP

Torque the spark plug. (If you donot have a torque wrench, tightenthe spark plug two-thirds of a turnafter it contacts the cylinder head.)Tightening torque:

Put the new spark plug into thesocket, then screw it into the hole.Screw it in by hand so you do notcrossthread it.

8.7.

CONTINUED

Spark Plugs

Maintenance 315

13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)

Tighten the spark plugs caref ully. Aspark plug that is too loose canoverheat and damage the engine.Overtightening can cause damage tothe threads in the cylinder head.

＋－

Install the ignition coil. Reinstallthe hexagon socket head cap bolt.

Push the wire connector onto theignition coil. Make sure it locks inplace.

Repeat this procedure for theother five spark plugs.

Reinstall the cover on the frontcylinder bank while putting itsmounting clip in the hole on thepassenger’s side. Secure the coverby turning the heads of the twoholding clips one-quarter turnclockwise with a flat-tippedscrewdriver.

Spark Plug Gap:

Reinstall the engine cover andtighten the four bolts securely.

NGK:DENSO:

9.

11.

10.

12.

13.

Spark Plugs

Maintenance

Specifications:

316

PZFR5F-11PKJ16CR-L11

0.04 in (1.1 mm) 00.1 mm

－

Check the condition of your vehicle’sbattery monthly. You should checkthe color of the test indicator window,and for corrosion on the terminals.

Check the battery terminals forcorrosion (a white or yellowishpowder). To remove it, cover theterminals with a solution of bakingsoda and water. It will bubble up andturn brown. When this stops, wash itoff with plain water. Dry off thebattery with a cloth or paper towel.Coat the terminals with grease tohelp prevent future corrosion.

If the terminals are severely cor-roded, clean them with baking sodaand water. Then use a wrench toloosen and remove the cables fromthe terminals. Always disconnect thenegative ( ) cable first and recon-nect it last. Clean the battery termi-nals with a terminal cleaning tool orwire brush. Reconnect and tightenthe cables, then coat the terminalswith grease.

Check the battery condition bylooking at the test indicator windowon the battery.The label on the battery explains thetest indicator’s colors.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

CONTINUED

Battery

Maintenance

WARNING:

Wash hands after handling.

317

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damage to the vehicle’selectrical system.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, theAUTO feature of the driver’s windowwill be disabled. You should reset theAUTO feature (see page ).126

Battery

Maintenance318

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

Charging the battery with the cablesconnected can seriously damage yourvehicle’s electronic controls. Detachthe battery cables bef ore connectingthe battery to a charger.

CONTINUED

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Look for signs of cracking in therubber, or areas that are gettinghard. Replace the blades if you findthese signs, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold the lock tab inwhile you push the blade assemblytoward the base of the arm.

Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield.

To replace a wiper blade:

Front windshield: Raise the driver’sside first, then the passenger’sside.

2.

1.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance 319

WIPER ARMS

LOCK TAB

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and the arms.

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metal rein-forcement along the back edge,remove the metal reinforcementstrips from the old wiper blade andinstall them in the slots along theedge of the new blade.

Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Front windshield: Lower thepassenger’s side first, then thedriver’s side.

6.

7.

4.

5.

3.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance320

BLADEBLADE

REINFORCEMENT

Run the air conditioning at least oncea week during the cold weathermonths. Run it for at least tenminutes while you are driving at asteady speed with the engine atnormal operating temperature. Thiscirculates the lubricating oil con-tained in the refrigerant.

If the air conditioning does not get ascold as before, have your dealercheck the system. Recharge thesystem with Refrigerant HFC-134a(R-134a). (See Specifications on page

.)

Your vehicle’s air conditioning is asealed system. Any major mainte-nance, such as recharging, should bedone by a qualified mechanic. Youcan do a couple of things to makesure the air conditioning worksefficiently.

Periodically check the engine’sradiator and air conditioningcondenser for leaves, insects, anddirt stuck to the front surface. Theseblock the air flow and reduce coolingefficiency. Use a light spray from ahose or a soft brush to remove them.

386

Maintenance

Air Conditioning System

321

AIR CONDITIONINGCONDENSER

Whenever you have the air conditioningsystem serviced, make sure the servicef acility uses a ref rigerant recyclingsystem. This system captures theref rigerant f or reuse. Releasingref rigerant into the atmosphere candamage the environment.

The condenser and radiator f ins bendeasily. Only use a low-pressure sprayor sof t-bristle brush to clean them.

－－

Check the condition of the two drivebelts (power steering belt andalternator belt). Examine the edgesof each belt for cracks or fraying.

If you see signs of wear or looseness,have your dealer adjust or replacethe belts.

Power steering belt:

The belt should have the following‘‘play’’ or deflection.

Check the tension of the powersteering belt by pushing on it withyour thumb midway between thepulleys.

The dust and pollen filter removespollen and dust that is brought infrom the outside through the heatingand cooling system/climate controlsystem.

This filter should be replaced every30,000 miles (48,000 km) undernormal conditions. It should bereplaced every 15,000 miles (24,000km) if you drive primarily in urbanareas that have high concentrationsof soot in the air from industry anddiesel-powered vehicles. Replace itmore often if air flow from theheating and cooling system/climatecontrol system becomes less thanusual. Have the dust and pollen filterreplaced by your Honda dealer.

Drive BeltsDust and Pollen Filter

Maintenance

Dust and Pollen Filter, Drive Belts

322

POWER STEERING BELT

ALTERNATOR BELT

0.51 0.65 in (13.0 16.5 mm)

－－ We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated. Thefollowing pages give more detailedinformation on how and when tocheck air pressure, how to inspectyour tires for damage and wear, andwhat to do when your tires need tobe replaced.

The timing belt should normally bereplaced at the intervals shown inthe maintenance schedule.

Replace the belt at 60,000 miles (U.S.)or 100,000 km (Canada) if you regu-larly drive your vehicle in one ormore of these conditions:

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort. Underinflated tires wearunevenly, adversely affect handlingand fuel economy, and are morelikely to fail from being overheated.Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, are moreprone to damage from road hazards,and wear unevenly.

CONTINUED

Timing Belt, Tires

Maintenance

InflationTiresTiming Belt

323

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

The following chart shows therecommended cold tire pressures formost normal driving conditions andspeeds. Tire pressures for highspeed driving are the same as fornormal driving.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

If you check the pressure when thetires are hot (the vehicle has beendriven several miles), you will seereadings 4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3to 0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreading. This is normal. Do not letair out to match the specified coldpressure. The tire will beunderinflated.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure at least once a month. Eventires that are in good condition maylose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.Remember to check the spare tire atthe same time you check all theother tires.

Check the pressure in the tires whenthey are cold. This means the vehiclehas been parked for at least threehours. If you have to drive thevehicle before checking the tirepressure, the tires can still beconsidered ‘‘cold’’ if you drive lessthan 1 mile (1.6 km).

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

Tires

Maintenance

Recommended Tire Pressures forNormal Driving

324

225/60R16 98T 36 psi (250 kPa , 2.5kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Your vehicle’s tires have wear indica-tors molded into the tread. When thetread wears down to that point, youwill see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wideband running across the tread. Thisshows there is less than 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. Atire that is this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see thetread wear indicator in three or moreplaces around the tire.

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.You should look for:

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Excessive tread wear.

These pressures are also given onthe tire information label on thedriver’s doorjamb.

Tubeless tires have some ability toself-seal if they are punctured.However, because leakage is oftenvery slow, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

Inspection

Tires

Maintenance 325

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, youshould have the tires rotated every7,500 miles (12,000 km). Move thetires to the positions shown in thechart each time they are rotated.

Make sure the installer balances thewheels when you have new tiresinstalled. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. Your vehicle’soriginal tires were dynamic or ‘‘spin’’balanced at the factory. For bestresults, have the installer perform adynamic balance.

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

The tires were properly balanced bythe factory. They may need to berebalanced at some time before theyare worn out. Have your dealercheck the tires if you feel a consis-tent vibration while driving. A tireshould always be rebalanced if it isremoved from the wheel for repair.

On some models

Tires

Maintenance

Tire RotationMaintenance

326

Front Front

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)Improper wheel weights can damage

your vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly genuine Honda wheel weights f orbalancing.

CONTINUED

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, then replace the twofront tires or the two rear tires as apair. Replacing just one tire canseriously affect your vehicle’s han-dling.

When shopping for replacementtires, you may find that some tiresare ‘‘directional.’’ This means theyare designed to rotate only in onedirection. If you use directional tires,they should be rotated only front-to-back.

The tires that came with yourvehicle were selected to match theperformance capabilities of thevehicle while providing the bestcombination of handling, ridecomfort, and long life. You shouldreplace them with radial tires of thesame size, load range, speed rating,and maximum cold tire pressurerating (as shown on the tire’ssidewall). Mixing radial and bias-plytires on your vehicle can reduce itsbraking ability, traction, and steeringaccuracy.

Tires

Maintenance

Replacing Tires and Wheels

327

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

＋Tires that are marked ‘‘M S’’ or‘‘All Season’’ on the sidewall have anall-weather tread design. Theyshould be suitable for most winterdriving conditions. Tires withoutthese markings are designed foroptimum traction in dry conditions.They may not provide adequateperformance in winter driving.For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. When replacingtires, use the same size originallysupplied with the vehicle. Tire sizeand construction can affect wheelspeed and may cause the system towork inconsistently.

If you ever need to replace a wheel,make sure the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheelthat came on your vehicle. Re-placement wheels are available atyour Honda dealer.

Wheel:

Tire:

See page for information aboutDOT Tire Quality Grading.

388

Winter DrivingWheels and Tires

Tires

Maintenance328

16 x 6 1/2 JJ

225/60R16 98T

If you mount snow tires on yourHonda, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas the original tires. Mount snowtires on all four wheels to balanceyour vehicle’s handling in all weatherconditions. Keep in mind the tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay not be as high as your vehicle’soriginal equipment tires. You shoulddrive cautiously even when the roadsare clear. Check with the tire dealerfor maximum speed recommenda-tions.

Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should notbe used. No matter how tight theyseem to be installed, they can comeinto contact with the body andsuspension, causing serious damage.

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions andmount them as tightly as you can.Drive slowly with them installed. Ifyou hear them coming in contactwith the body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Make sure the cables areinstalled tightly, and that they arenot contacting the brake lines orsuspension. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

Because your Honda has limited tireclearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’cable-type traction devices on thefront tires. Use traction devices onlywhen required by driving conditionsor local laws. Make sure they are thecorrect size for your tires.

Snow Tires Tire Chains

Tires

Maintenance 329

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

Check the operation of your vehicle’sexterior lights at least once a month.A burned out bulb can create anunsafe condition by reducing yourvehicle’s visibility and the ability tosignal your intentions to otherdrivers.

Lights

Maintenance330

HEADLIGHT TURN SIGNAL/SIDE MARKER/PARKING LIGHTS

Check the following:

Headlights (low and high beam)Parking lightsTaillightsBrake lightsHigh-mount brake lightTurn signalsBack-up lightsHazard light functionLicense plate lightSide marker lightsDaytime running lights(Canadian models)

If you find any bulbs are burned out,replace them as soon as possible.Refer to the chart on page todetermine what type of replacementbulb is needed.

387

Lights

Maintenance 331

STOP/TAILLIGHTS/SIDE MARKER LIGHTS

TAILLIGHT HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT

TURN SIGNAL LIGHT BACK-UP LIGHT LICENSE PLATE LIGHT

Unclip the end of the hold-downwire from its slot. Pivot it out ofthe way and remove the bulb.

Remove the rubber weather sealby pulling on the tab.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pulling theconnector straight back.

Your vehicle has halogen headlightbulbs, one on each side. Whenreplacing a bulb, handle it by its steelbase and protect the glass fromcontact with your skin or hardobjects. If you touch the glass, cleanit with denatured alcohol and a cleancloth.

Open the hood.

If you need to change the head-light bulb on the driver’s side,remove the air intake cover (seepage ).

The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thecargo area or pull a trailer,readjustment may be required.Adjustment of the headlights shouldbe performed by a Honda technicianor other qualified mechanic.

1.

2.

3.

4.

311

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing a Headlight BulbHeadlight Aiming

332

HOLD-DOWN WIRE WEATHERSEAL

BULB CONNECTORHalogen headlight bulbs get very hotwhen lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratchon the glass can cause the bulb tooverheat and shatter.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender.

Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender and bumper.

If you are changing the bulb onthe driver’s side, start the engine,turn the steering wheel all the wayto the right, and turn off theengine. If you are changing thebulb on the passenger’s side, turnthe steering wheel to the left.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,making sure the tabs are in theirslots. Pivot the hold-down wireback in place and clip the end intothe slot.

Install the rubber seal over theback of the headlight assembly.Make sure it is right side up; it ismarked ‘‘TOP.’’

Push the electrical connector ontothe new bulb. Make sure it isconnected securely.

Reinstall the air intake cover.(Driver’s side)

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

1. 2.

3.

5.

6.

7.

8.

CONTINUED

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing the Front Side Marker/Turn Signal and Parking LightBulb

333

HOLDING CLIP

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the burned out bulb fromthe socket by pushing it in andturning the bulb counterclockwiseuntil it unlocks.

Install the new bulb in the socket.Turn it clockwise to lock it in place.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Put the inner fender in place.Install the two holding clips. Lockeach clip in place by pushing onthe center.

Determine which of the two bulbsis burned out: stop/taillight/sidemarker light or turn signal light.

Pull the taillight assembly out ofthe body by sliding it backward.

Use a Phillips-head screwdriver toremove the taillight assemblymounting screw under each cover.

Open the tailgate. Release thecovers by inserting a flat-tipscrewdriver into the slot until thecover bows slightly. Then pivotthe screwdriver 90° and pull itstraight out of the slot.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

1.

2.

3.

4.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Fenders)

334

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.Push the new bulb straight intothe socket until it bottoms.

Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

When reinstalling the taillightassembly, align and pop the snapfasteners in place. Tighten the twomounting screws and reinstall thecovers in place.

Open the tailgate. Place a cloth onthe edge of the taillight cover.Remove it by carefully prying inthe notch on its edge with a smallflat-tipped screwdriver.

Determine which of the two bulbsis burned out: taillight or back-uplight.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.


2.

3.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9. 1.

CONTINUED

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Tailgate)

335

TAILLIGHT COVER


Insert the socket back into thelight assembly. Turn it clockwiseto lock it in place.

Reinstall the taillight cover.

Pull the light assembly out of thetailgate.

Remove the socket from the lightassembly by turning it one-quarterturn counterclockwise.


Place a cloth on the edge of thelens segment on the passenger’sside. Remove that lens segment bycarefully prying on its edge with asmall flat-tipped screwdriver.

Use a Phillips-head screwdriver toremove the screw under the lens.


1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

4.

5.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

336

SCREW

CONTINUED

Put the socket back into the lightassembly and turn it clockwise tolock it in place.

Remove the license light assemblyby carefully prying on the leftedge of the lens with a flat-tipscrewdriver and pulling theassembly out.

Remove the lens from the bulbholder by pulling the lens whilesqueezing the tabs on both sidesof the holder.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket. Push the new bulb in untilit bottoms in the socket.

Put the light assembly back intothe tailgate. Install the screw andtighten it securely. Reinstall thelens segment.


2.

3.

6.

7.

8.

1.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing a Rear License PlateBulb

337

Turn on the parking lights andcheck that the new bulb isworking.

Put the lens back on the bulbholder and push it until it latches.

Slide the left side of the lightassembly into the hole. Push onthe right side to latch theassembly into place.

The individual map lights, cargo arealight, and the vanity mirror lightscome apart the same way. They donot all use the same type of bulbs.

Remove the lens by carefullyprying on the edge of the lens witha fingernail file or a small flat-tipscrewdriver. Do not pry on theedge of the housing around thelens.

1.

4.

5.

6.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing Bulbs in the InteriorLights

338

FRONT INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHT

Remove the bulb by pulling itstraight out of its metal tabs.

Push the new bulb into the metaltabs. Snap the lens back in place.

Front individual map light:Pry on the front edge in front of bothmap lights.

Rear individual map light:Pry on the middle edge of the lensnear the vent.

Cargo area light:Pry on the rear edge to the left andright of center.

3.2.

CONTINUED

Lights

Maintenance 339

REAR INDIVIDUAL MAP LIGHT CARGO AREA LIGHT

Lights

Maintenance340

SUN VISOR

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than onemonth), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter(see page ).

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc. arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Park.

Support the front and rear wiperblade arms with a folded towel orrag so they do not touch thewindshield.

Disconnect the battery.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand tailgate seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand tailgate seals.

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Nonporous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, run the engine for awhile periodically (preferably oncea month).

If you store your vehicle for 12months or longer, have your Hondadealer perform the inspections calledfor in the 24 months/30,000 miles(48,000 km) maintenance schedule(Normal Conditions) as soon as youtake it out of storage (see page ).The replacements called for in themaintenance schedule are notneeded unless the vehicle hasactually reached that time or mileage.

299

288

Storing Your Vehicle

Maintenance 341

342

Regular cleaning and polishing ofyour Honda helps to keep it ‘‘new’’looking. This section gives youinformation on how to clean yourvehicle and preserve its appearance:the paint, brightwork, wheels andinterior. Also included are severalthings you can do to help preventcorrosion.

.................................Exterior Care . 344.....................................Washing . 344

.......................................Waxing . 345....................Aluminum Wheels . 345

..........................Paint Touch-up . 345..................................Interior Care . 346...................................Carpeting . 346..................................Floor mats . 346

.........................................Fabric . 347...........................................Vinyl . 347

.......................................Leather . 347...................................Seat Belts . 347....................................Windows . 348

..........................Air Fresheners . 348....................Corrosion Protection . 349

.................................Body Repairs . 350

Appearance Care

Appearance Care 343

Frequent washing helps preserveyour vehicle’s beauty. Dirt and gritcan scratch the paint, while tree sapand bird droppings can permanentlyruin the finish.

Wash your vehicle in a shady area,not in direct sunlight. If the vehicle isparked in the sun, move it into theshade and let the exterior cool downbefore you start.

When you have washed and rinsedthe whole exterior, dry it with achamois or soft towel. Letting itair-dry will cause dulling and waterspots.

As you dry the vehicle, inspect it forchips and scratches that could allowcorrosion to start. Repair them withtouch-up paint (see page ).

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly withcool water to remove loose dirt.

Only use the solvents and cleanersrecommended in this Owner’sManual.

Fill a bucket with cool water. Mixin a mild detergent, such asdishwashing liquid or a productmade especially for car washing.

Wash the vehicle using the waterand detergent solution and a soft-bristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.Start at the top and work your waydown. Rinse frequently.

Check the body for road tar, treesap, etc. Remove these stains withtar remover or turpentine. Rinse itoff immediately so it does notharm the finish. Remember to re-wax these areas, even if the rest ofthe vehicle does not need waxing.

Your vehicle is equipped with anantenna on the front right fender.Before using a ‘‘drive-through’’ carwash, make sure you remove theantenna by unscrewing it by hand.This prevents the antenna frombeing damaged by the car washbrushes.

345

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Washing

344

Chemical solvents and strong cleanerscan damage the paint, metal, andplastic on your vehicle.

－

－

Your dealer has touch-up paint tomatch your vehicle’s color. The colorcode is printed on a sticker on thedriver’s doorjamb. Take this code toyour dealer so you are sure to getthe correct color.

Inspect your vehicle frequently forchips or scratches in the paint.Repair them right away to preventcorrosion of the metal underneath.Use the touch-up paint only on smallchips and scratches. More extensivepaint damage should be repaired bya professional.

Always wash and dry the wholevehicle before waxing it. You shouldwax your vehicle, including the metaltrim, whenever water sits on thesurface in large patches. It shouldform into beads or droplets afterwaxing.

The wheels have a protective clear-coat that keeps the aluminum fromcorroding and tarnishing. Usingharsh chemicals, including somecommercial wheel cleaners, or stiffbrushes can damage this clear-coat.Only use a mild detergent and softbrush or sponge to clean the wheels.

Clean your Honda’s aluminum alloywheels as you do the rest of theexterior. Wash them with the samesolution, and rinse them thoroughly.

Cleaning tar, insects, etc. withremovers also takes off the wax.Remember to re-wax those areas,even if the rest of the vehicle doesnot need waxing.

Polishes Polishes and cleaner/waxes can restore the shine to paintthat has oxidized and lost some of itsshine. They normally contain mildabrasives and solvents that remove

the top layer of the finish. Youshould use a polish on your Honda ifthe finish does not have its originalshine after using a wax.

Waxes A wax coats the finish andprotects it from damage by exposureto sunlight, air pollution, etc. Youshould use a wax on your Hondawhen it is new.

You should use a quality liquid orpaste wax. Apply it according to theinstructions on the container. Ingeneral, there are two types ofproducts:

On some models

Exterior Care

Appearance Care

Paint Touch-upWaxing

Aluminum Wheels

345

Vacuum the carpeting frequently toremove dirt. Ground-in dirt will makethe carpet wear out faster.Periodically shampoo the carpet tokeep it looking new. Use one of thefoam-type carpet cleaners on themarket. Follow the instructions thatcome with the cleaner, applying itwith a sponge or soft brush. Keepthe carpeting as dry as possible bynot adding water to the foam.

If you remove the driver’s floor mat,make sure to re-anchor it when youput it back in your vehicle.

If you replace it, use a Honda floormat that is designed to be used withthe floor mat anchors in your vehicle.

If you use a non-Honda floor mat inthe driver’s footwell, make sure itfits properly and that it can be usedwith the floor mat anchor.

Do not put additional floor mats ontop of the anchored mat, otherwisethe additional mats may slideforward and interfere with the pedals.

The Honda driver’s floor mat thatcame with your vehicle was designedto be hooked over the floor matanchor. This keeps the floor matfrom sliding forward and possiblyinterfering with the pedals.

Carpeting Floor Mats

Interior Care

Appearance Care346

Remove dirt and dust with a vacuumcleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a softcloth dampened in a solution of mildsoap and water. Use the samesolution with a soft-bristle brush onmore difficult spots. You can also usecommercially-available spray orfoam-type vinyl cleaners.

Vacuum dirt and dust out of thematerial frequently. For generalcleaning, use a solution of mild soapand lukewarm water, letting it air dry.To clean off stubborn spots, use acommercially-available fabric cleaner.Test it on a hidden area of the fabricfirst, to make sure it does not bleachor stain the fabric. Follow theinstructions that come with thecleaner.

If your seat belts get dirty, you canuse a soft brush with a mixture ofmild soap and warm water to cleanthem. Do not use bleach, dye, orcleaning solvents. They can weakenthe belt material. Let the belts air-dry before you use the vehicle.

Vacuum dirt and dust from theleather frequently. Pay particularattention to the pleats and seams.Clean the leather with a soft clothdampened with clear water, thenbuff it with a clean, dry cloth. Iffurther cleaning is needed, use asoap specifically for leather, such assaddle soap. Apply this soap with adamp, soft cloth. Wipe down andbuff as described above.

CONTINUED

On EX-L model

Interior Care

Appearance Care

Fabric

Vinyl

Seat BeltsLeather

347

LOOP

If you use a liquid air freshener,make sure you fasten it securely so itdoes not spill as you drive.

If you want to use an air freshener/deodorizer in the interior of yourvehicle, it is best to use a solid type.Some liquid air fresheners containchemicals that may cause parts ofthe interior trim and fabric to crackor discolor.

Clean the windows, inside and out,with a commercially-available glasscleaner. You can also use a mixtureof one part white vinegar to ten partswater. This will remove the haze thatbuilds up on the inside of thewindows. Use a soft cloth or papertowels to clean all glass and clearplastic surfaces.

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

Interior Care

Appearance Care

Air FreshenersWindows

348

The rear window def ogger wires arebonded to the inside of the glass.Wiping vigorously up-and-down candislodge and break the def ogger wires.When cleaning the rear window, usegentle pressure and wipe side-to-side.

Two factors normally contribute tocausing corrosion in your vehicle:

Moisture trapped in body cavities.Dirt and road salt that collects inhollows on the underside of thevehicle stays damp, promotingcorrosion in that area.

Removal of paint and protectivecoatings from the exterior andunderside of the vehicle.

Repair chips and scratches in thepaint as soon as you discover them.

Many corrosion-preventive measuresare built into your Honda. You canhelp keep your vehicle fromcorroding by performing somesimple periodic maintenance:

Inspect and clean out the drainholes in the bottom of the doorsand body.

Check the floor coverings fordampness. Carpeting and floormats may remain damp for a longtime, especially in winter. Thisdampness can eventually causethe floor panels to corrode.

Use a high-pressure spray to cleanthe underside of your vehicle. Thisis especially important in areasthat use road salt in winter. It isalso a good idea in humid climatesand areas subject to salt air. Becareful of the ABS wheel sensorsand wiring at each wheel.

Have the corrosion-preventivecoatings on the underside of yourvehicle inspected and repairedperiodically.

1.

2.

Corrosion Protection

Appearance Care 349

Body repairs can affect your vehicle’sresistance to corrosion. If yourvehicle needs repairs after a collision,pay close attention to the parts usedin the repair and the quality of thework.

Make sure the repair facility usesHonda replacement body parts.Some companies make sheet metalpieces that seem to duplicate theoriginal Honda body parts, but areactually inferior in fit, finish, andcorrosion resistance. Once installed,they do not give the same high-quality appearance.

When reporting your collision to theinsurance company, tell them youwant Honda parts used in the repair.Although most insurers recognizethe quality of original parts, somemay try to specify that the repairs bedone with other available parts. Youshould investigate this before anyrepairs have begun.

Take your vehicle to your authorizedHonda dealer for inspection after therepairs are completed. Your dealercan make sure that quality materialswere used, and that corrosion-preventive coatings were applied toall repaired and replaced parts.

Body Repairs

Appearance Care350

This section covers the more-common problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 352....................Changing a Flat Tire . 353

..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 362Nothing Happens or the

Starter Motor Operates........................Very Slowly . 362

The Starter Operates................................Normally . 363................................Jump Starting . 364

............If Your Engine Overheats . 366.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 369..........Charging System Indicator . 370

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 371.......................Readiness Codes . 372

...............Brake System Indicator . 373..............................................Fuses . 374

..........Checking and Replacing . 375......................Emergency Towing . 380

Taking Care of the Unexpected

Taking Care of the Unexpected 351

Your vehicle has a compact sparetire that takes up less space. Use thisspare tire as a temporary replace-ment only. Get your regular tirerepaired or replaced and put it backon your vehicle as soon as you can.

The compact spare tire has a shortertread life than a regular tire. Replaceit when you can see the tread wearindicator bars. The replacementshould be the same size and designtire, mounted on the same wheel.The compact spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the compact wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces than the regular tire. Usegreater caution while driving onthis tire.

Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)under any circumstances.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou are using the compact spare tire:

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare.

Do not use the compact spare tireif you are towing a trailer.

The wheel of the compact sparetire is designed especially to fityour vehicle. Do not use yourspare tire on another vehicleunless it is the same make andmodel.

Turn off the Traction ControlSystem (see page ). Drivingwith the compact spare tire mayactivate the TCS.

269

Compact Spare Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected352

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Stopping in traffic or on the shoulderof a busy road is dangerous. Driveslowly along the shoulder until youget to an exit or an area to stop thatis far away from the traffic lanes.

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground away fromtraffic. Put the transmission inPark. Apply the parking brake.If you are towing a trailer, unhitchthe trailer.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0). Have all thepassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

2.1.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire


JACK VINYL BAG

SPARE TIRETOOLS

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

Open the tailgate. Take the tools out of the storagecompartment.

The spare tire is stored under thefloor between the first and secondrow of seats. If the front seats areadjusted to the rear-most position,move the seats forward slightlyand adjust the seat-backs to anupright position (see page ).

Lift up the center table (see page).

Turn the jack’s end bracketcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack.

Remove the cargo net.

The tools and jack are behind acover in the cargo area on thedriver’s side. Remove the cover byturning the handlecounterclockwise, then pulling outthe cover.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

130

110



COVER

CONTINUED

Open either of the rear slidingdoors. Pull the floor carpet up bylifting up on the edge, then raisethe floor lid by pulling up on thehandle. To keep the floor carpetand lid out of the way, pull out thehook on the back of the floor lidand attach it into the seat-backhandle on the driver’s seat.

Remove the spare tire basket.

Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of its well. Afteryou have removed the spare tire,screw this wing bolt back intoplace.

Loosen the five wheel nuts 1/2turn with the wheel wrench.

If you are changing a rear tire,close the sliding door. Then turnoff the sliding door MAIN switch.

8. 9. 11.

12.

10.

On EX and EX-L models On EX and EX-L models



HOOK

HANDLE

SPARE TIREBASKET

SPARE TIRE WING BOLT

WHEEL NUTS

△

Use the extension and wheelwrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Temporarilyplace the flat tire on the groundwith the outside surface of thewheel facing up. You could scratchthe wheel if you put it face down.

Locate the jacking point nearestthe tire you need to change. It ispointed to by a mark moldedinto the underside of the body.Place the jack under the jackingpoint. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

13. 14. 15.



JACKING POINT

EXTENSION

WHEELWRENCH

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully, it may be hot fromdriving.

Do not attempt to forcibly pry thewheel cover off with a screwdriver orother tool. The wheel cover cannotbe removed without first removingthe wheel nuts.

16. 17.

CONTINUED

On LX model



WHEELCOVER

HUB

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Lower the vehicle to the groundand remove the jack.

Put the flat tire in the suppliedvinyl bag. This bag is stored in therear compartment on the driver’sside panel in the third row. Knotthe top of the vinyl bag.

18. 19. 20.



80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

CONTINUED

You will find a u-shaped slit on thecarpet behind the seat bottom ofthe third seat. Pull up the carpet atthe slit and remove the plasticscrew with a coin.

When the third seat is not folded,the flat tire is secured behind thethird seat.

Remove the bracket and the wingbolt from the spare tire lid byunscrewing the bracket mountingbolt.

Turn on the sliding door MAINswitch so you can open the door.

21.

22.

Storing the flat tire behind the thirdseat




BRACKET MOUNTING BOLT

WING BOLT BRACKETMOUNTINGBOLT

BRACKETPLASTICSCREW

BRACKET

Storing the Flat Tire on the FloorWhen the third seat is folded, theflat tire is secured to the floor ontop of the folded seat. Pull up thecarpet on the attachment point andremove the plastic screw asdescribed in the previousprocedure.

Remove the wing bolt from thebracket that is attached to thespare tire lid.

Install the flat tire on the bracketwith the inside of the wheel facingtoward you. Put the tire mountingwing bolt in the attachment pointthrough one of the five wheel nutholes and the bracket as shown.Poke holes in the vinyl bag. Securethe flat tire by tightening the wingbolt.

Adjust the seat-back of the thirdseat to the upright position (seepage ). Install the bracket andthe bracket mounting bolt to theattachment point as shown, andtighten the bolt. Make sure thebracket is securely locked.

23.

111



BRACKET

TIRE MOUNTING WING BOLT

Unclip the hook from the seatback handle on the driver’s seatand lower the floor lid and thecarpet.

Make sure to adjust the frontseats properly before you startdriving (see page ).

Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jack’s end bracket clockwise tolock it in place. Store the tools.Replace the cover.

Close the tailgate.

Store the plastic screw in the sparetire well.

Store the wheel cover in the sparetire well. Make sure it will not getscratched or damaged.

Store the spare tire basket in thespare tire well.

Place the flat tire face down on theattachment point. Put the tiremounting wing bolt in theattachment point through one ofthe five wheel nut holes as shown.Poke holes in the vinyl bag. Securethe flat tire by tightening the wingbolt.

24.

25.

26.

27.

110

On LX model




TIRE MOUNTING WING BOLT

ATTACHMENT POINT

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

Diagnosing why your engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn thekey to START (III):

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

Turn the ignition switch to START(III). If the headlights do not dim,check the condition of the fuses. Ifthe fuses are OK, there is proba-bly something wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem. (See

on page .)

When you turn the ignition switch toSTART (III), you do not hear thenormal noise of the engine trying tostart. You may hear a clicking soundor series of clicks, or nothing at all.Check these things:

Check the transmission interlock.The transmission must be in Parkor Neutral or the starter will notoperate.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).Turn on the headlights and checktheir brightness. If the headlightsare very dim or don’t light at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

380

364


If Your Engine Won’t Start

Emergency Towing

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

362

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition of thebattery and terminal connections(see page ). You can then tryjump starting the vehicle from abooster battery (see page ).

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to START (III), butthe engine does not run.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

Your vehicle has the ImmobilizerSystem. You should use aproperly-coded master or valet keyto start the engine (see page ).A key that is not properly codedwill cause the immobilizer systemindicator in the dash panel to blinkrapidly.

Do you have fuel? Turn theignition switch to ON (II) for aminute and watch the fuel gauge.The low fuel level warning lightmay not be working, so you werenot reminded to fill the tank.

317

364

259

374

380

90

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

EmergencyTowing

If Your Engine Won’t Start


＋

＋

If your vehicle’s battery has rundown, you may be able to start theengine by using a booster battery.Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

You cannot start a Honda by pushingor pulling it.

To jump start your vehicle, followthese directions closely:

Open the hood and check thephysical condition of the battery(see page ). In very coldweather, check the condition ofthe electrolyte. If it seems slushyor like ice, do not try jump startinguntil it thaws.

Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: heater, A/C, climatecontrol, stereo system, lights, etc.

Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourHonda’s battery. Connect theother end to the positive ( )terminal on the booster battery.

1.

2.

3.

317


Jump Starting

364

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

－Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then the booster battery.

Keep the ends of the jumper cablesaway from each other and any metalon the vehicle until all aredisconnected. Otherwise, you maycause an electrical short.

Start your vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthe jumper cable connections tomake sure they have good metal-to-metal contact.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

The numbers in the illustrationshow you the order to connect thejumper cables.

4.

6.

7.

5.

Jump Starting


BOOSTERBATTERY

Your vehicle can overheat for severalreasons, such as lack of coolant or amechanical problem. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.In either case, you should takeimmediate action.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark and set the parking brake.Turn off the heating and cooling/climate control system and allother accessories. Turn on thehazard warning indicators.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine.

The pointer of your vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange under most conditions.It may go higher if you are driving upa long steep hill on a very hot day. Ifit climbs to the red mark, you shoulddetermine the reason.

1.

2.

If Your Engine Overheats


Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to your engine.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading(climbing a long, steep hill on ahot day with the A/C running, forexample), the engine should startto cool down almost immediately.If it does, wait until the tempera-ture gauge comes down to the mid-point then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Wait until you see no more signsof steam or spray, then open thehood.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank (see page

). If the level is below theMIN mark, add coolant to halfwaybetween the MIN and MAX marks.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may also have toadd coolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

3.

7.

6.

5.

4.

380

249

8.

CONTINUED

EmergencyTowing



Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. Thisreleases any remaining pressure inthe cooling system. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap and turn it until it comesoff.

Start the engine and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum (climate control toFULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Addcoolant to the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck. If you donot have the proper coolantmixture available, you can addplain water. Remember to havethe cooling system drained andrefilled with the proper mixture assoon as you can.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair. (See

on page .)

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

9.

10.

11.

12.

380



EmergencyTowing

368

This indicator should light when theignition switch is ON (II), and go outafter the engine starts. It shouldnever come on when the engine isrunning. If it starts flashing, itindicates that the oil pressuredropped very low for a moment, thenrecovered. If the indicator stays onwith the engine running, it showsthat the engine has lost oil pressureand serious engine damage ispossible. In either case, you shouldtake immediate action.

Safely pull off the road and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood and check the oillevel (see page ). Although oillevel and oil pressure are notdirectly connected, an engine thatis very low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

Start the engine and watch the oilpressure indicator. If the lightdoes not go out within ten seconds,turn off the engine. There is amechanical problem that needs tobe repaired before you cancontinue driving. (See

on page .)1.

2.

3.

4.

248

297

380Emergency

Towing

Low Oil Pressure Indicator


LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

This indicator should come on whenthe ignition switch is ON (II), and goout after the engine starts. If itcomes on brightly when the engineis running, it indicates that thecharging system has stoppedcharging the battery.

By eliminating as much of theelectrical load as possible, you candrive several miles (kilometers)before the battery is too dischargedto keep the engine running. Drive toa service station or garage whereyou can get technical assistance.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories: radio, heater, A/C,climate control, rear defogger, cruisecontrol, etc. Try not to use otherelectrically-operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning and take extra care not tostall it. Starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

Charging System Indicator


CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

If the indicator remains on past threedriving trips, or the fuel cap was notloose or missing, have the vehiclechecked by the dealer as soon aspossible. Drive moderately until thedealer has inspected the problem.Avoid full-throttle acceleration anddriving at high speed.

You should also have the dealerinspect your vehicle if this indicatorcomes on repeatedly, even though itmay turn off as you continue driving.

This indicator should light when theignition switch is ON (II), and go outafter the engine starts. If it comes onat any other time, it indicates one ofthe engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeyour vehicle to put out excessiveemissions. Continued operation maycause serious damage.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the cause of this indicatorcoming on could be a loose ormissing fuel fill cap. Check the capand tighten it until it clicks severaltimes. Replace the fuel fill cap if it ismissing. Tightening the cap will notmake the indicator turn offimmediately; it takes at least threedriving trips. This indicator may also come on

along with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.

CONTINUED

Malfunction Indicator Lamp


MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If your vehicle’s battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It takes severaldays of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

If possible, do not take your vehiclefor a state emissions test until thereadiness codes are set. Refer toState Emissions Testing for moreinformation. (See page .)

To check if they are set, turn theignition ON (II), but do not start theengine. The Malfunction IndicatorLamp will come on for 20 seconds. Ifit then goes off, the readiness codesare set. If it blinks 5 times, thereadiness codes are not set.

395

Readiness Codes

Malfunction Indicator Lamp


＊

＊

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. Because of thebrake system’s dual-circuit design, aproblem in one part of the systemwill still give you braking at twowheels. You will feel the brake pedalgo down much farther before thevehicle begins to slow down, and youwill have to press harder on thepedal. The distance needed to stopwill be much longer.

If it comes on at any other time, itindicates a problem with the vehicle’sbrake system. In most cases, theproblem is a low fluid level in thebrake fluid reservoir. Press lightly onthe brake pedal to see if it feelsnormal. If it does, check the brakefluid level the next time you stop at aservice station (see page ). If thefluid level is low, take the vehicle toyour dealer and have the brakesystem inspected for leaks or wornbrake pads.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of thelonger distance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed, and repaired assoon as possible. (See

on page .)

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and cautiously.

The Brake System Indicatornormally comes on when you turnthe ignition switch ON (II). It is areminder to check the parking brake.It comes on and stays lit if you do notfully release the parking brake.

If the ABS indicator and the TCSindicator come on with this indicator,have the vehicle inspected by yourdealer immediately.

309380

EmergencyTowing

Brake System Indicator


BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

U.S. indicator shown

All the electrical circuits in yourvehicle have fuses to protect themfrom a short circuit or overload.These fuses are located in four fuseboxes.

The interior fuse boxes are locatedunderneath the dashboard on eachside.

To open the fuse box on thepassenger’s side, pull the right edgeof the cover.

The primary under-hood fuse box islocated in the back of the enginecompartment on the passenger’s side.To open it, push the tabs as shown.

Fuses


DRIVER’S SIDE INTERIOR

PASSENGER’S SIDEINTERIOR

PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

CONTINUED

The secondary fuse box is in theengine compartment next to thebattery.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on page

to , or the diagram on thefuse box lid (the diagram for thedriver’s side interior fuse box is onthe kick panel below the fuse box),which fuse or fuses control thatcomponent. Check those fuses first,but check all the fuses beforedeciding that a blown fuse is not thecause. Replace any blown fuses andcheck the component’s operation.

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0). Make sure the headlights andall other accessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

Check each of the large fuses inthe primary under-hood fuse boxby looking through the top at thewire inside. Removing these fusesrequires a Phillips-head screw-driver.

1.

2.

379377

3.

Fuses


Checking and Replacing Fuses

375

FUSE

BLOWN

SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse boxes bypulling out each fuse with the fusepuller provided in the primaryunder-hood fuse box.

Look for a burned wire inside thefuse. If it is burned, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits. Makesure you can do without that circuittemporarily (such as the accessorypower socket or radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

5.4.

Fuses


FUSE PULLER

BLOWN

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have a replace-ment f use with the proper rating f or thecircuit, install one with a lower rating.

－

＊

＊

＊

CONTINUED

Amps.No. Circuits Protected

No. Amps. Circuits ProtectedIf the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem in your vehicle.Leave the blown fuse in thatcircuit and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified mechanic.

If the driver’s power window fuse isremoved, the AUTO feature of thedriver’s window will be disabled. Youshould reset the AUTO feature (seepage ).

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the Preset buttons toenter the five-digit code (see page

).

6.

126

200

20 A30 A15 A15 A15 A

20 A15 A20 A

123456789

Spare FuseSpare FuseRight HeadlightACG SHazardNot UsedStopLeft HeadlightABS F/S

101112131415161718192021222324

40 A30 A30 A40 A40 A40 A30 A

7.5 A10 A15 A

120 A30 A

7.5 A50 A30 A

Power Window MotorPower Sliding DoorRear DefrosterBack Up, ACCPower SeatHeater MotorCooling FanSpare FuseSpare FuseSpare FuseBatteryCondenser FanMG ClutchIgnition Switch (IG 1 Main)ABS Motor

: EX and EX-L models


Fuses


PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

－－

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

12 7

89

1011

20 A

20 A30 A40 A20 A

Rear Entertaiment systemNot UsedSeat HeatersDriver’s Power WindowRear A/CPower Sliding Door

1 :2 :

EX-L modelEX and EX-L model

1

1

2

Fuses


SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

On Canadian models

123

456789

10111213

15 A10 A

7.5 A

7.5 A7.5 A15 A15 A

7.5 A10 A

7.5 A10 A30 A

7.5 A

Fuel PumpSRSHeater Control, A/C ClutchRelay, Cooling Fan RelayPower MirrorDaytime Running LightECU (PCM), Cruise ControlIG CoilACC RelayBack-up Lights, InstrumentLightsTurn SignalsRear WiperFront WiperStarter Signal

Driver’s Side AutomaticSliding DoorPower Seat RecliningBSCPower Seat SlidingPassenger’s Side AutomaticSliding DoorDaytime Running LightLeft Rear WindowFront Passenger’s PowerWindowACC SocketInst. Panel Light, LicenseLightInterior Light, RadioPower Door LocksClock, Back UpABS Motor CheckDriver’s Power WindowRight Rear Window

1

2345

678

910

111213141516

20 A

20 A10 A20 A20 A

10 A7.5 A20 A

15 A15 A

10 A20 A

7.5 A7.5 A20 A

7.5 A

1 :2 :

EX and EX-L modelsCanadian models

No. Amps. Circuits Protected Circuits ProtectedNo. Amps.

1

1

1

2

Fuses


Driver’s Side

INTERIOR FUSE BOX

Passenger’s Side

FrontFront

:

－

－

－

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service or,if you belong to one, an organizationthat provides roadside assistance.Never tow your vehicle behindanother vehicle with just a rope orchain. It is very dangerous.

The towtruck uses metal cables with hookson the ends. These hooks go aroundparts of the frame or suspension andthe cables lift that end of the vehicleoff the ground. Your vehicle’s sus-pension and body can be seriouslydamaged.

If your Honda cannot be transportedby flat-bed, it should be towed bywheel-lift equipment with the frontwheels off the ground. If, due todamage, your vehicle must be towedwith the front wheels on the ground,do the following.

With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the vehicle no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

There are three popular types ofprofessional towing equipment.

The operatorloads your vehicle on the back of atruck.

The towtruck uses two pivoting arms that gounder the tires (front or rear) and liftthem off the ground. The other twotires remain on the ground.

Release the parking brake.Start the engine.Shift to D, then to N.Turn off the engine.

Sling-type Equipment

Flat-bed Equipment

Wheel-lif t Equipment

This method of towingis unacceptable.

This is the best way to trans-port your Honda.

This isan acceptable way to tow yourHonda.

Emergency Towing


Improper towing preparation willdamage the transmission. Follow theabove procedure exactly. If you cannotshif t the transmission or start theengine, your vehicle must be trans-ported with the f ront wheels of f theground.

If you decide to tow your vehiclewith all four wheels on the ground,make sure you use a properly-designed and attached tow bar.Prepare the vehicle for towing asdescribed above, and leave theignition switch in Accessory (I) sothe steering wheel does not lock.Make sure the radio and any itemsplugged into the accessory powersocket are turned off so they do notrun down the battery.

Emergency Towing


The steering system can be damaged ifthe steering wheel is locked. Leave theignition switch in Accessory (I), andmake sure the steering wheel turnsf reely bef ore you begin towing.

Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by thebumpers will cause serious damage.The bumpers are not designed tosupport the vehicle’s weight.

382

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour Honda, and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 384................................Specifications . 386

DOT Tire Quality Grading.......................(U.S Vehicles) . 388

Uniform Tire Quality..................................Grading . 388.................................Treadwear . 388

......................................Traction . 388.............................Temperature . 389

.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 390......Driving in Foreign Countries . 391

.......................Emissions Controls . 392.....................The Clean Air Act . 392

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 392

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 392

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 392

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 393....................PGM-FI System . 393

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 393

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 393

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 393

....................Replacement Parts . 393..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 394

..............State Emissions Testing . 395

Technical Information

Technical Information 383

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers located in various places.

The Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourHonda dealer uses to register yourvehicle for warranty purposes. It isalso necessary for licensing andinsuring your vehicle. The easiestplace to find the VIN is on a platefastened to the top of the dashboard.You can see it by looking throughthe windshield on the driver’s side. Itis also on the Certification label at-tached to the driver’s doorjamb, andis stamped on the engine com-partment bulkhead. The VIN is alsoprovided in bar code on theCertification label.

Identif ication Numbers

Technical Information384

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

The Transmission Number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

The Engine Number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the front.

Identif ication Numbers


ENGINE NUMBER

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

－－

＊

＊

＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications


Dimensions

Weights

Air Conditioning

Capacities

201.2 in (5,110 mm)75.6 in (1,920 mm)

5.3 US qt (5.0 , 4.4 Imp qt)

2.6 US qt (2.5 , 2.2 Imp qt)

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity:0.16 US gal (0.6 , 0.13 Imp gal)Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.

4.6 US qt (4.4 , 3.9 Imp qt)

4.2 US qt (4.0 , 3.5 Imp qt)

2.48 US gal (9.4 , 2.07 Imp gal)

3.5 US qt (3.3 , 2.9 Imp qt)8.3 US qt (7.9 , 7.0 Imp qt)

4.8 US qt (4.5 , 4.0 Imp qt)

HFC-134a (R-134a)

66.1 in (1,680 mm)66.1 in (1,680 mm)118.1 in (3,000 mm)

68.5 in (1,740 mm)

32 34 oz (850 900 g)ND-OIL8

20.00 US gal (75.7 , 16.65 Imp gal)1.98 US gal (7.5 , 1.65 Imp gal)

69.7 in (1,770 mm)

LengthWidthHeight

WheelbaseTrack

Gross vehicle weight rating

Gross combined weightrating (GCWR)

See the tire information label atta-ched to the driver’s doorjamb.

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

Fuel tank

EnginecoolantEngine oil

AutomatictransmissionfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

8,265 lbs (3,750 kg)

Approx.

FrontRear

1 :

2 :

ChangeTotalChange

IncludingfilterWithoutfilter

TotalChangeTotal

U.S. VehiclesCanada Vehicles

1 : LX2 : EX, EX-L

1

2

1

2

－

－－

－－

－－－－－－－－

－－

Specifications


Lights

Battery

Fuses

Engine

Alignment

Tires

12 V 21 W12 V 21/5 W

3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)212 cu-in (3,471 cm )

10 : 1

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.00 in (0.0 mm)

0°0°30’

2°07’

225/60R16 98TT135/80D16 101M

36 psi (250 kPa , 2.5 kgf/cm )60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

24/2.2 CP

12 V 1.8 W12 V 8 W

12 V 21 W12 V 3 CP

2 CP

21 CP (18 W)4 CP10 W

12 V

12 V12 V12 V

12 V60/55 W (HB2)12 V

65 AH/20 HR52 AH/5 HR12 V

12 V

HeadlightsFront turn signal/parking/sidemarker lightsRear turn signal lightsStop/Taillights/Rear sidemarker lightsTaillightsBack-up lightsLicense plate lightHigh-mount brake lightIndividual map lights

Cargo area lightVanity mirror lights

Capacity

Interior

Under-hood

Type

Bore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

Toe-in

Camber

Caster

Size

Pressure

See page 379 or the fuse labelattached to the dashboard.See page 379 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door under the dashboard.

See spark plug maintenance sec-tion page 316 .

See pages 377 and 378 or the fusebox cover.

High/Low

Front/RearSpareFront/RearSpare

FrontRearFrontRearFront

FrontRear

Driver’s side

Passenger’s side

(Amber)

Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC VTEC,6-cylinder, gasoline engine

－The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance accordingto Department of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.


DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

388

－The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance which all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, cancause heat buildup and possible tirefailure.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)


Temperature A, B, C

389

Some conventional gasolines arebeing blended with alcohol or anether compound. These gasolinesare collectively referred to asoxygenated fuels. To meet clean airstandards, some areas of the UnitedStates and Canada use oxygenatedfuels to help reduce emissions.

If you use an oxygenated fuel, besure it is unleaded and meets theminimum octane rating requirement.

Before using an oxygenated fuel, tryto confirm the fuel’s contents. Somestates/provinces require thisinformation to be posted on thepump.

The following are the U.S. EPA andCanadian CGSB approvedpercentages of oxygenates:

(Methyl Tertiary ButylEther)You may use gasoline containing upto 15 percent MTBE by volume.

(ethyl or grain alcohol)You may use gasoline containing upto 10 percent ethanol by volume.Gasoline containing ethanol may bemarketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’

(methyl or woodalcohol)Your vehicle was not designed to usefuel that contains methanol.Methanol can corrode metal parts inthe fuel system, and also damageplastic and rubber components. Thisdamage would not be covered byyour warranties.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

Fuel system damage or performanceproblems resulting from the use ofan oxygenated fuel containing morethan the percentages of oxygenatesgiven above are not covered underwarranty.MTBE

ETHANOL

METHANOL


Oxygenated Fuels

390

If you are planning to take yourHonda outside the U.S. or Canada,contact the tourist bureaus in theareas you will be traveling in to findout about the availability of unleadedgasoline with the proper octanerating.

If unleaded gasoline is not available,be aware that using leaded gasolinein your Honda will affect perfor-mance and fuel mileage, and damageits emissions controls. It will nolonger comply with U.S. andCanadian emissions regulations, andwill be illegal to operate in NorthAmerica. To bring your vehicle backinto compliance will require the re-placement of several components,such as the oxygen sensors and thethree way catalytic converter. Thesereplacements are not covered underwarranty.


Driving in Foreign Countries

391

＊

＊

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx) and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on page

.

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a PositiveCrankcase Ventilation System. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The Positive Crank-

case Ventilation valve routes themfrom the crankcase back to theintake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

The Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

288

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem


Emissions Controls

392

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,Ignition Timing Control, ExhaustGas Recirculation and Three WayCatalytic Converter. These foursystems work together to control theengine’s combustion and minimizethe amount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcomes out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.The PGM-FI System uses sequential

multiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: Air Intake,Engine Control, and Fuel Control.The Powertrain Control Module(PCM) uses various sensors todetermine how much air is goinginto the engine. It then controls howmuch fuel to inject under all operat-ing conditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO and NOx produced.

The Exhaust Gas Recirculation(EGR) system takes some of theexhaust gas and routes it back intothe intake manifold. Adding exhaustgas to the air/fuel mixture reducesthe amount of NOx produced whenthe fuel is burned.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), dinitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Three Way Catalytic Converter


Emissions Controls

393

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire any com-bustible materials that come near it.Park your vehicle away from highgrass, dry leaves, or other flamma-bles.

Three Way Catalytic Converter


THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

CONTINUED

If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle re-tested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for re-testingby doing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 8hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 20° and95°F.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission). Increasethe engine speed to 2,000 rpm andhold it there until the temperaturegauge rises to at least 1/4 of thescale (approximately 3 minutes).


State Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes

395

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour Honda dealer.

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (A/T). Do not use the cruisecontrol. When traffic allows, drivefor 90 seconds without moving theaccelerator pedal. (Vehicle speedmay vary slightly; this is okay.) Ifyou cannot do this for acontinuous 90 seconds because oftraffic conditions, drive for at least30 seconds, then repeat it twomore times (for a total of 90seconds).

State Emissions Testing


Customer Relations................................Information . 398

....................Warranty Coverages . 399Reporting Safety Defects

..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 400.....................Authorized Manuals . 401

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty and Customer Relations 397

Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. TheService Manager or GeneralManager can help. Almost allproblems are solved in this way.

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact your HondaCustomer Relations Office.

U.S. Owners:

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicleDate of purchaseMileage on your vehicleYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

Canadian Owners:

384

Customer Relations Information

Warranty and Customer Relations398

CUSTOMER RELATIONS

RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE

Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, Puerto Rico 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 250-4318

American Honda Motor Co.Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7A1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9

Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909Toronto (416) 287-4776

－－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of thevehicle.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from a Honda dealer.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

Your new Honda is covered by thesewarranties:

covers all genuineHonda replacement parts againstdefects in materials and workman-ship.

genuine Honda Accessories arecovered under this warranty. Timeand mileage limits depend on thetype of accessory and other factors.Please read your warranty manualfor details.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’s emis-sions control systems. Time, mileage,and coverage are conditional. Pleaseread the warranty manual for exactinformation.

this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2003 Honda Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your Honda’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2003 WarrantyManual that came with your vehicle.

Seat Belt Limited Warranty Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited WarrantyNew Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

Warranty Coverages

Warranty and Customer Relations 399

To contact NHTSA, you may eithercall the Auto Safety Hotline toll-freeat 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inWashington D.C. area) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department ofTransportation, Washington,D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

Warranty and Customer Relations400

－

＊

＊

＊

＊２００３

ＨＯＮ

The following publications covering the operation andservicing of your vehicle can be obtained from HelmIncorporated, either by filling out the attached form or,for credit card holders, calling the toll-free phone numberon the form. For manuals prior to the year shown below,contact Helm Incorporated, P.O. Box 07280, Detroit,Michigan 48207, or call 1-800-782-4356.

Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners shouldcontact their authorized Honda dealer.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals(U.S. only)

401

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Price

Each

$70.00

$50.00

$44.00

$34.00

$29.00

$10.00

FREE

Form Description

1999-2003 Honda Odyssey

Service Manual


Electrical Troubleshooting Manual


Body Repair Manual

2002 Honda Odyssey

Owner’s Manual

2003 Honda Odyssey

Navigation System Owner’s Manual

2003 Honda Odyssey

Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Publication

Form Number

61S0X04

61S0X04EL

61S0X30

31S0X640

31S0X740

31S0XQ00

HON-R

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.00

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurringobligation.

－

－

－

ＳＨＩＰ

ＴＯ

ＰＡＹＭＥＮＴ

This manual complements the Service Manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

402

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

CONTINUED

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 72, 370............................Jump Starting . 364

..............................Maintenance . 317............................Specifications . 387

..............................Before Driving . 243....................................Belts, Seat . 8, 50

.........................Beverage Holders . 132.................................Body Repairs . 350

Brakes...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 267

.............Break-in, New Linings . 244....................Bulb Replacement . 334

...........................................Fluid . 309.......................................Parking . 129

.................System Indicator . 72, 373........................Wear Indicators . 266

.............................Braking System . 266.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 244

..Brightness Control, Instruments . 83........................Brights, Headlights . 82

Bulb Replacement..........................Back-up Lights . 335

..............................Brake Lights . 334......................Cargo Area Light . 338

................Front Parking Lights . 333........Front Side Marker Lights . 333

.................................Headlights . 332.........High-mount Brake Light . 336

..............Individual Map Lights . 338...................License Plate Light . 337

...Accessories and Modifications . 251................................Accessories . 251

.Additional Safety Precautions . 252............................Modifications . 252

ACCESSORY (Ignition Key.......................................Position) . 92

............Accessory Power Sockets . 138....................Additives, Engine Oil . 299

........Advanced Airbag System . 10, 54.............................Airbag (SRS) . 10, 54

.....................Air Cleaner Element . 311......Air Conditioning System . 144, 152

..............................Maintenance . 321.....................Rear A/C Control . 166

.........................Usage . 147, 154, 160...............Air Outlets (Vents) . 146, 152.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 323.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 390

.......Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning . 345......................................Antifreeze . 301

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)...............................Indicator . 74, 268

...................................Operation . 267..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 200

.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 91..........................Appearance Care . 343

........................................Armrests . 115...............Audio Controls, Remote . 199

................Audio System . 169, 181, 201...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 52...Automatic Lighting Off Feature . 83

.............Automatic Speed Control . 235..............Automatic Transmission . 260

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 386...............Checking Fluid Level . 307

.......................................Shifting . 261.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 260

................Shift Lever Positions . 261....................Shift Lock Release . 263

Index

A

B

I

＊

Bulb Replacement.........................Rear Bulbs . 334, 335

............................Specifications . 387....................Turn Signal Lights . 333

..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 332

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii...................................Dashboard . 2, 70

................Daytime Running Lights . 83............Defects, Reporting Safety . 400

................Defogger, Rear Window . 87

................................Cancel Button . 237............................Capacities Chart . 386

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 66..........................Cargo Area Light . 141

.................................Cargo Hooks . 256......................................Cargo Net . 256

.............................Carrying Cargo . 253Cassette Player

............................................Care . 198...................Operation . 174, 195, 209

..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii..................CD Changer . 177, 191, 214

......................CD Player . 177, 189, 212...............................Center Pocket . 136

..................................Center Table . 130........................Certification Label . 384

............................................Chains . 329

Changing Oil........................................How to . 299......................................When to . 288

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 353............Changing Engine Coolant . 303

...Charging System Indicator . 72, 370............Checklist, Before Driving . 258

..................Childproof Door Locks . 98.....................................Child Safety . 24

.......................................Child Seats . 30......LATCH Anchorage System . 48

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 46....................Cleaner Element, Air . 311

Cleaning....................Aluminum Wheels . 345

...................................Carpeting . 346......................................Exterior . 344

.........................................Fabric . 347.......................................Interior . 346.......................................Leather . 347

...................................Seat Belts . 347...........................................Vinyl . 347

....................................Windows . 348...............Climate Control System . 152

.........................Clock, Setting the . 130......................................Coat Hook . 137

.....................Code, Audio System . 200........................CO in the Exhaust . 392

...................................Coin Holder . 136............Cold Weather, Starting in . 259

..............................Compact Spare . 352...............Consumer Information . 398

.............Controls, Instruments and . 69Coolant

........................................Adding . 301....................................Checking . 249

.........................Proper Solution . 301...................................Replacing . 303

...................Temperature Gauge . 79....................Corrosion Protection . 349

Crankcase Emissions Control........................................System . 392

............Cruise Control Operation . 235..........Customer Relations Office . 398

Index

C

D

II

CONTINUED

Defrosting.............the Windows . 149, 159, 164

....................................Dimensions . 386...............Dimming the Headlights . 82

Dipstick..........Automatic Transmission . 307

..................................Engine Oil . 248..........................Directional Signals . 84

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 266.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 300

Doors..............Locking and Unlocking . 92

....................Lockout Prevention . 93..............Manual Sliding Doors . 101

..............................Monitor Light . 75......................Power Door Locks . 92

.................Power Sliding Doors . 103..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 388

.....................................Drive Belts . 322...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5

...........................................Driving . 257....................................Economy . 250

.........................In Bad Weather . 272................In Foreign Countries . 391

..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 322...................................DVD Player . 217

............................Fabric, Cleaning . 347..................Fan, Interior . 144, 157, 162

Features, Comfort and..............................Convenience . 143

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 245Filters

................................Air Cleaner . 311.........................Dust and Pollen . 322

...............................................Oil . 299.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 87

...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 353

..............................Economy, Fuel . 250............Emergencies on the Road . 351.............Battery, Jump Starting . 364...........Brake System Indicator . 373

................Changing a Flat Tire . 353.....Charging System Indicator . 370

..................Checking the Fuses . 374.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 369...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 371

..................Overheated Engine . 366.........................Emergency Brake . 129

......................Emergency Flashers . 87......................Emergency Towing . 380.......................Emissions Controls . 392

.............Emissions Testing, State . 395Engine

....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 79.................................Drive Belts . 322

..............Engine Speed Limiter . 263Malfunction Indicator

................................Lamp . 72, 371........Oil Pressure Indicator . 72, 369..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 297

...............................Overheating . 366

............................Specifications . 387.......................................Starting . 259

......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 390.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 392

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 66Exhaust Gas Recirculation

........................................System . 393Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 22..................Exterior, Cleaning the . 344

Index

E

F

III

.....................................Floor Mats . 346Fluids

..........Automatic Transmission . 307..........................................Brake . 309

..........................Power Steering . 310................Windshield Washers . 306

FM Stereo Radio...................Reception . 170, 182, 203

.................Folding the Third Seat . 120.....Foreign Countries, Driving in . 391

..........................Four-way Flashers . 87............................Front Airbags . 10, 54

.................................................Fuel . 244......................Fill Door and Cap . 245

...........................................Gauge . 79................Octane Requirement . 244

...............................Oxygenated . 391........................Reserve Indicator . 77

........................Tank, Filling the . 345.....................Fuses, Checking the . 375

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 250..........................................Gasohol . 390

.........................................Gasoline . 244...............Fuel Reserve Indicator . 77

...........................................Gauge . 79................Octane Requirement . 244

........................Tank, Filling the . 245................Gas Station Procedures . 245

Gauges...Engine Coolant Temperature . 79

...............................................Fuel . 79...............................Speedometer . 78

.................................Tachometer . 78GAWR (Gross Axle Weight

.......................................Rating) . 276GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

.......................................Rating) . 276..............................Glass Cleaning . 348

......................................Glove Box . 100GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

.......................................Rating) . 276

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 384Ignition

..............................................Keys . 89

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 332..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 87

........................................Headlights . 82........................................Aiming . 332

..............Automatic Lighting Off . 83............Daytime Running Lights . 83

..................High Beam Indicator . 76.........................Reminder Chime . 82

........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 332...................................Turning on . 82

...................................Headphones . 231............................Head Restraints . 115

...............................Heated Mirror . 129.....................Heating and Cooling . 144

.............High Altitude, Starting at . 259.................High-Low Beam Switch . 82

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 238

....................................Hood Latch . 313.......................Hood, Opening the . 246

..............................................Horn . 3, 81.................................Hydroplaning . 273

Index

GH

I

IV

CONTINUED

.......................Label, Certification . 384.................Lane Change, Signaling . 84

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 17, 50.............LATCH Anchorge System . 48

....................Light Control Switch . 139Lights

....................Bulb Replacement . 332.......................................Indicator . 71

.......................................Interior . 139

.........................................Parking . 82..................................Turn Signal . 84

............................Load Limits . 254, 274......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 91

Locks.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 91

............................Fuel Fill Door . 245..................................Glove Box . 100

....................Lockout Prevention . 93.................................Power Door . 92.....................Sliding Doors . 101, 103

........................................Tailgate . 98........................Low Coolant Level . 249.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 77

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 72, 369................................Lower Anchors . 48

...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 386.........................................Luggage . 253

..................................Maintenance . 283...Owner Maintenance Checks . 295

.................................Record . 293-294......................Required Indicator . 80

..........................................Safety . 284.............................Schedule . 286-292

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 64, 371...................Manual Sliding Doors . 101

...............................Meters, Gauges . 78...................Methanol in Gasoline . 390

........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 128Moving the Second Row Bucket

.............................................Seat . 117.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 356.......................................Jack, Tire . 354

................................Jump Starting . 364

..................................................Keys . 89

...........................................Switch . 91............Timing Control System . 393

........................Immobilizer System . 90.........Important Safety Precautions . 6

.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 71..................Individual Map Lights . 141

...............................Infant Restraint . 34......................................Infant Seats . 30

......LATCH Anchorage System . 48...........................Lower Anchors . 48

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 46...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 323

.................................Inside Mirror . 128.............................Inspection, Tire . 325

........................Instrument Panel . 2, 70........Instrument Panel Brightness . 83

...........................Interior Cleaning . 346...............................Interior Lights . 139

........................................Introduction . i

Index

J

K

L

M

V

...................Neutral Gear Position . 262..................New Vehicle Break-in . 244

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i...............Numbers, Identification . 384

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 244.........................................Odometer . 78

...............................Odometer, Trip . 79Oil

........................Change, How to . 299......................Change, When to . 288......................Checking Engine . 248..............Pressure Indicator . 72, 369

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 298

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 92Onboard Refueling Vapor

....................................Recovery . 392..Operation in Foreign Countries . 391

............................Outside Mirrors . 128....................Overheating, Engine . 366

.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 295

.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 390

...................Radiator Overheating . 366.....Radio/CD Sound System . 181, 201

...........................Readiness Codes . 372...............................Rear A/C Unit . 166

.......................Rear Compartment . 135........Rear Entertainment System . 217

Rear Lights, Bulb......................Replacement . 334, 335

..........................Rear View Mirror . 128.................Rear Window Defogger . 87

...............................Rear Windows . 127.Rear Window Wiper and Washer . 86

.....Reclining the Seat Backs . 111, 114.........Reclining the Second Seats . 111

..............Reclining the Third Seat . 111.............................Reminder Lights . 71

..............................Paint Touch-up . 345..............Panel Brightness Control . 83

........................Park Gear Position . 261...........................................Parking . 265

...............................Parking Brake . 129Parking Brake and Brake

.................System Indicator . 72, 373.................................Parking Lights . 82

..Parking Over Things that Burn . 265Passenger Airbag Cutoff

.......................................Indicator . 62.............................PGM-FI System . 393

..................Polishing and Waxing . 345Power Sliding Doors

...............................Indicator . 75, 108...................................Operation . 103

.....................................Switches . 104............Pre-Drive Safety Checklist . 12

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 22............................Protecting Adults . 13

...Additional Safety Precautions . 22.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 22

........................Protecting Children . 24.......................Protecting Infants . 34

.......Protecting Larger Children . 42.........Protecting Small Children . 38

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 46

.............................Using LATCH . 48

Index

P

RO

N

VI

＊

＊

CONTINUED

................Remote Audio Controls . 199.............................Remote Control . 223

.......................Remote Transmitter . 94Removing the Second

...........................................Seats . 119Replacement Information

.................Air Cleaner Element . 311..........................Engine Coolant . 303

................Engine Oil and Filter . 299..........................................Fuses . 375

................................Light Bulbs . 332....................................Schedule . 286

................................Spark Plugs . 313

................................Timing Belt . 323...........................................Tires . 327

.............................Wiper Blades . 319Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 53Reserve Tank,

.................Engine Coolant . 249, 301..................Reverse Gear Position . 262

................................Rotation, Tire . 326

..................................Safety Belts . 8, 50

.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 400.................................Safety Features . 7

.........................................Airbags . 10..................................Door Locks . 11

..........................Head Restraints . 11.......................................Seat Belts . 8

.....................Seats & Seat-Backs . 11.............Safety Labels, Location of . 67

...............................Safety Messages . ii.....................................Seat Belts . 8, 50

...............Additional Information . 50Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 52.....................................Cleaning . 347

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 50................................Maintenance . 53

Reminder Light and................................Beeper . 50, 73

................................Replacement . 53...................System Components . 50

...............Use During Pregnancy . 22...Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt . 17

..................................Seat Heaters . 123...............................................Seats . 109

..............................Adjustments . 110..........Drivers Lumbar Support . 114

.............Folding the Third Seat . 120........................Head Restraints . 115

.....Manual Height Adjustment . 112....................Passenger Seating . 109

.......Reclining the Second Seat . 111..........Reclining the Third Seat . 111

....Removing the Second Seats . 119.....................Third Seat Access . 116

............................Security System . 234Sensors

Front Passenger’s Weight.....................................Sensors . 57

....Driver’s Seat Position Sensor . 56...............................Serial Number . 384

...........................Service Intervals . 288

...........................Service Manual . 401.........Service Station Procedures . 245

..........................Setting the Clock . 130.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 260

........................Shift Lock Release . 263..............................Side Airbags . 10, 59

..........................Cutoff Indicator . 60Side Marker Lights, Bulb

..............................Replacement . 333

Index

S

VII

.....................................Tachometer . 78............................................Tailgate . 98

.................................Opening the . 98...................Open Monitor Light . 75

.Taillights, Changing Bulbs . 334, 335.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 351

...................Tape Player . 174, 195, 209Technical Descriptions

.....Emissions Control Systems . 392.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 390

Three Way Catalytic...............................Converter . 394

.......................Temperature Gauge . 79...................Tensioners, Seat Belts . 52

..............Tether Anchorage Points . 46............................Theft Protection . 200

..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 394..........................Time, Setting the . 130

....................................Timing Belt . 323

....................................Tire Chains . 329.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 353

...............................................Tires . 323..............................Air Pressure . 323

...................................Balancing . 326.........................Checking Wear . 325..........................Compact Spare . 352

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 388......................................Inflation . 323

..................................Inspection . 325...................................Replacing . 327

......................................Rotating . 326...........................................Snow . 329

............................Specifications . 387................................Tire Chains . 329

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 353

...............................Signaling Turns . 84.........................Sliding Doors . 101, 103

.....................................Snow Tires . 329...................Solvent-type Cleaners . 344

................Sound System . 169, 181, 201Spare Tire

......................................Inflating . 352............................Specifications . 387

....................................Spark Plugs . 313....................Specifications Charts . 386

................................Speed Control . 235...................................Speedometer . 78

..........SRS, Additional Information . 54...Additional Safety Precautions . 65

.............................Airbag Service . 64..How the SRS Indicator Works . 59

.....How Your Airbags Work . 55, 59........................SRS Components . 54

.............................SRS Indicator . 59, 73....START (Ignition Key Position) . 92

.......................Starting the Engine . 259In Cold Weather at High

..................................Altitude . 259................With a Dead Battery . 364..............State Emissions Testing . 395

........Steam Coming from Engine . 366

Steering Wheel..................................Adjustment . 88

.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 91...Stereo Sound System . 169, 181, 201....................Storing Your Vehicle . 341

...................................Storage Box . 137........................Sunglasses Holder . 134

........................................Sun Visor . 134Supplemental Restraint System

......................................Servicing . 64.........................SRS Indicator . 59, 73

...................System Components . 54..................................Synthetic Oil . 298

Index

T

VIII

＊

＊

................................Vanity Mirror . 135.........Vehicle Capacity Load . 254, 274

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 386....Vehicle Identification Number . 384

.............................Vehicle Storage . 341.............................Ventilation . 147, 152

.................................................VIN . 384...............................Vinyl Cleaning . 347

..................................Viscosity, Oil . 298

.....................Underside, Cleaning . 349Unexpected, Taking Care

..........................................of the . 351....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 388

........................Unleaded Gasoline . 244.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 346

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 300

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 67

..................Warranty Coverages . 399Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 306............................Level Indicator . 77

.....................................Operation . 86.........................................Washing . 344

..................Waxing and Polishing . 345Wheels

...............Adjusting the Steering . 88............Alignment and Balance . 326

..........................Compact Spare . 352......................................Wrench . 356

Windows.............................Auto Reverse . 126

.....................................Cleaning . 348................Operating the Power . 124

............................................Rear . 127...........................Rear, Defogger . 87

Windshield.......................................Cleaning . 84...................Defroster . 149, 159, 164

.......................................Washers . 86Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 319.....................................Operation . 84

Rear Windshield Wiper and.....................................Washer . 86

..................Wireless Headphones . 231....................................Worn Tires . 325

.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 380

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 274

................Emergency Wrecker . 380Tranction Control

.............................System(TCS) . 269Transmission

...............Checking Fluid Level . 307...........................Fluid Selection . 308

..............Identification Number . 384.............Shifting the Automatic . 261

.....................................Treadwear . 388

.......................................Trip Meter . 79....................................Turn Signals . 84

: U.S. and Canada only

Index

U

V

W

IX

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):Power Steering Fluid:

Brake Fluid:Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

36 psi (250 kPa , 2.5 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 86 or higher.

Front/Rear:

Compact Spare Tire:

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

4.6 US qt (4.4 , 3.9 Imp qt)

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (see page

).

297

307

310

309

20.00 US gal (75.7 , 16.65 Imp gal)

Documents

200 Odyssey Online Reference Owner's Manualtechinfo.honda.com/rjanisis/pubs/OM/AH/AOD0303OM/enu/OD...2003 Odyssey Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout